1 |
15 |
khays |
\input texinfo @c -*- Texinfo -*-
|
2 |
|
|
@setfilename binutils.info
|
3 |
|
|
@settitle @sc{gnu} Binary Utilities
|
4 |
|
|
@finalout
|
5 |
|
|
@synindex ky cp
|
6 |
|
|
|
7 |
|
|
@c man begin INCLUDE
|
8 |
|
|
@include bfdver.texi
|
9 |
|
|
@c man end
|
10 |
|
|
|
11 |
|
|
@copying
|
12 |
|
|
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
|
13 |
|
|
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
|
14 |
|
|
2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
|
15 |
|
|
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
16 |
|
|
|
17 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
18 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
|
19 |
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
20 |
|
|
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
|
21 |
|
|
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
|
22 |
|
|
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
23 |
|
|
|
24 |
|
|
@c man end
|
25 |
|
|
@end copying
|
26 |
|
|
|
27 |
|
|
@dircategory Software development
|
28 |
|
|
@direntry
|
29 |
|
|
* Binutils: (binutils). The GNU binary utilities.
|
30 |
|
|
@end direntry
|
31 |
|
|
|
32 |
|
|
@dircategory Individual utilities
|
33 |
|
|
@direntry
|
34 |
|
|
* addr2line: (binutils)addr2line. Convert addresses to file and line.
|
35 |
|
|
* ar: (binutils)ar. Create, modify, and extract from archives.
|
36 |
|
|
* c++filt: (binutils)c++filt. Filter to demangle encoded C++ symbols.
|
37 |
|
|
* cxxfilt: (binutils)c++filt. MS-DOS name for c++filt.
|
38 |
|
|
* dlltool: (binutils)dlltool. Create files needed to build and use DLLs.
|
39 |
|
|
* nlmconv: (binutils)nlmconv. Converts object code into an NLM.
|
40 |
|
|
* nm: (binutils)nm. List symbols from object files.
|
41 |
|
|
* objcopy: (binutils)objcopy. Copy and translate object files.
|
42 |
|
|
* objdump: (binutils)objdump. Display information from object files.
|
43 |
|
|
* ranlib: (binutils)ranlib. Generate index to archive contents.
|
44 |
|
|
* readelf: (binutils)readelf. Display the contents of ELF format files.
|
45 |
|
|
* size: (binutils)size. List section sizes and total size.
|
46 |
|
|
* strings: (binutils)strings. List printable strings from files.
|
47 |
|
|
* strip: (binutils)strip. Discard symbols.
|
48 |
|
|
* elfedit: (binutils)elfedit. Update the ELF header of ELF files.
|
49 |
|
|
* windmc: (binutils)windmc. Generator for Windows message resources.
|
50 |
|
|
* windres: (binutils)windres. Manipulate Windows resources.
|
51 |
|
|
@end direntry
|
52 |
|
|
|
53 |
|
|
@titlepage
|
54 |
|
|
@title The @sc{gnu} Binary Utilities
|
55 |
|
|
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
|
56 |
|
|
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
|
57 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
58 |
|
|
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
|
59 |
|
|
@sp 1
|
60 |
|
|
@subtitle @value{UPDATED}
|
61 |
|
|
@author Roland H. Pesch
|
62 |
|
|
@author Jeffrey M. Osier
|
63 |
|
|
@author Cygnus Support
|
64 |
|
|
@page
|
65 |
|
|
|
66 |
|
|
@tex
|
67 |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \hfill Cygnus Support\par \hfill
|
68 |
|
|
Texinfo \texinfoversion\par }
|
69 |
|
|
@end tex
|
70 |
|
|
|
71 |
|
|
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
|
72 |
|
|
@insertcopying
|
73 |
|
|
@end titlepage
|
74 |
|
|
@contents
|
75 |
|
|
|
76 |
|
|
@node Top
|
77 |
|
|
@top Introduction
|
78 |
|
|
|
79 |
|
|
@cindex version
|
80 |
|
|
This brief manual contains documentation for the @sc{gnu} binary
|
81 |
|
|
utilities
|
82 |
|
|
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
|
83 |
|
|
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
|
84 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
85 |
|
|
version @value{VERSION}:
|
86 |
|
|
|
87 |
|
|
@iftex
|
88 |
|
|
@table @code
|
89 |
|
|
@item ar
|
90 |
|
|
Create, modify, and extract from archives
|
91 |
|
|
|
92 |
|
|
@item nm
|
93 |
|
|
List symbols from object files
|
94 |
|
|
|
95 |
|
|
@item objcopy
|
96 |
|
|
Copy and translate object files
|
97 |
|
|
|
98 |
|
|
@item objdump
|
99 |
|
|
Display information from object files
|
100 |
|
|
|
101 |
|
|
@item ranlib
|
102 |
|
|
Generate index to archive contents
|
103 |
|
|
|
104 |
|
|
@item readelf
|
105 |
|
|
Display the contents of ELF format files.
|
106 |
|
|
|
107 |
|
|
@item size
|
108 |
|
|
List file section sizes and total size
|
109 |
|
|
|
110 |
|
|
@item strings
|
111 |
|
|
List printable strings from files
|
112 |
|
|
|
113 |
|
|
@item strip
|
114 |
|
|
Discard symbols
|
115 |
|
|
|
116 |
|
|
@item elfedit
|
117 |
|
|
Update the ELF header of ELF files.
|
118 |
|
|
|
119 |
|
|
@item c++filt
|
120 |
|
|
Demangle encoded C++ symbols (on MS-DOS, this program is named
|
121 |
|
|
@code{cxxfilt})
|
122 |
|
|
|
123 |
|
|
@item addr2line
|
124 |
|
|
Convert addresses into file names and line numbers
|
125 |
|
|
|
126 |
|
|
@item nlmconv
|
127 |
|
|
Convert object code into a Netware Loadable Module
|
128 |
|
|
|
129 |
|
|
@item windres
|
130 |
|
|
Manipulate Windows resources
|
131 |
|
|
|
132 |
|
|
@item windmc
|
133 |
|
|
Genertor for Windows message resources
|
134 |
|
|
|
135 |
|
|
@item dlltool
|
136 |
|
|
Create the files needed to build and use Dynamic Link Libraries
|
137 |
|
|
@end table
|
138 |
|
|
@end iftex
|
139 |
|
|
|
140 |
|
|
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
141 |
|
|
Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
|
142 |
|
|
in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
143 |
|
|
|
144 |
|
|
@menu
|
145 |
|
|
* ar:: Create, modify, and extract from archives
|
146 |
|
|
* nm:: List symbols from object files
|
147 |
|
|
* objcopy:: Copy and translate object files
|
148 |
|
|
* objdump:: Display information from object files
|
149 |
|
|
* ranlib:: Generate index to archive contents
|
150 |
|
|
* readelf:: Display the contents of ELF format files
|
151 |
|
|
* size:: List section sizes and total size
|
152 |
|
|
* strings:: List printable strings from files
|
153 |
|
|
* strip:: Discard symbols
|
154 |
|
|
* elfedit:: Update the ELF header of ELF files
|
155 |
|
|
* c++filt:: Filter to demangle encoded C++ symbols
|
156 |
|
|
* cxxfilt: c++filt. MS-DOS name for c++filt
|
157 |
|
|
* addr2line:: Convert addresses to file and line
|
158 |
|
|
* nlmconv:: Converts object code into an NLM
|
159 |
|
|
* windres:: Manipulate Windows resources
|
160 |
|
|
* windmc:: Generator for Windows message resources
|
161 |
|
|
* dlltool:: Create files needed to build and use DLLs
|
162 |
|
|
* Common Options:: Command-line options for all utilities
|
163 |
|
|
* Selecting the Target System:: How these utilities determine the target
|
164 |
|
|
* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
165 |
|
|
* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
166 |
|
|
* Binutils Index:: Binutils Index
|
167 |
|
|
@end menu
|
168 |
|
|
|
169 |
|
|
@node ar
|
170 |
|
|
@chapter ar
|
171 |
|
|
|
172 |
|
|
@kindex ar
|
173 |
|
|
@cindex archives
|
174 |
|
|
@cindex collections of files
|
175 |
|
|
|
176 |
|
|
@c man title ar create, modify, and extract from archives
|
177 |
|
|
|
178 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
179 |
|
|
ar [@option{--plugin} @var{name}] [-]@var{p}[@var{mod} [@var{relpos}] [@var{count}]] @var{archive} [@var{member}@dots{}]
|
180 |
|
|
ar -M [ <mri-script ]
|
181 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
182 |
|
|
|
183 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION ar
|
184 |
|
|
|
185 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} @command{ar} program creates, modifies, and extracts from
|
186 |
|
|
archives. An @dfn{archive} is a single file holding a collection of
|
187 |
|
|
other files in a structure that makes it possible to retrieve
|
188 |
|
|
the original individual files (called @dfn{members} of the archive).
|
189 |
|
|
|
190 |
|
|
The original files' contents, mode (permissions), timestamp, owner, and
|
191 |
|
|
group are preserved in the archive, and can be restored on
|
192 |
|
|
extraction.
|
193 |
|
|
|
194 |
|
|
@cindex name length
|
195 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{ar} can maintain archives whose members have names of any
|
196 |
|
|
length; however, depending on how @command{ar} is configured on your
|
197 |
|
|
system, a limit on member-name length may be imposed for compatibility
|
198 |
|
|
with archive formats maintained with other tools. If it exists, the
|
199 |
|
|
limit is often 15 characters (typical of formats related to a.out) or 16
|
200 |
|
|
characters (typical of formats related to coff).
|
201 |
|
|
|
202 |
|
|
@cindex libraries
|
203 |
|
|
@command{ar} is considered a binary utility because archives of this sort
|
204 |
|
|
are most often used as @dfn{libraries} holding commonly needed
|
205 |
|
|
subroutines.
|
206 |
|
|
|
207 |
|
|
@cindex symbol index
|
208 |
|
|
@command{ar} creates an index to the symbols defined in relocatable
|
209 |
|
|
object modules in the archive when you specify the modifier @samp{s}.
|
210 |
|
|
Once created, this index is updated in the archive whenever @command{ar}
|
211 |
|
|
makes a change to its contents (save for the @samp{q} update operation).
|
212 |
|
|
An archive with such an index speeds up linking to the library, and
|
213 |
|
|
allows routines in the library to call each other without regard to
|
214 |
|
|
their placement in the archive.
|
215 |
|
|
|
216 |
|
|
You may use @samp{nm -s} or @samp{nm --print-armap} to list this index
|
217 |
|
|
table. If an archive lacks the table, another form of @command{ar} called
|
218 |
|
|
@command{ranlib} can be used to add just the table.
|
219 |
|
|
|
220 |
|
|
@cindex thin archives
|
221 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{ar} can optionally create a @emph{thin} archive,
|
222 |
|
|
which contains a symbol index and references to the original copies
|
223 |
|
|
of the member files of the archives. Such an archive is useful
|
224 |
|
|
for building libraries for use within a local build, where the
|
225 |
|
|
relocatable objects are expected to remain available, and copying the
|
226 |
|
|
contents of each object would only waste time and space. Thin archives
|
227 |
|
|
are also @emph{flattened}, so that adding one or more archives to a
|
228 |
|
|
thin archive will add the elements of the nested archive individually.
|
229 |
|
|
The paths to the elements of the archive are stored relative to the
|
230 |
|
|
archive itself.
|
231 |
|
|
|
232 |
|
|
@cindex compatibility, @command{ar}
|
233 |
|
|
@cindex @command{ar} compatibility
|
234 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{ar} is designed to be compatible with two different
|
235 |
|
|
facilities. You can control its activity using command-line options,
|
236 |
|
|
like the different varieties of @command{ar} on Unix systems; or, if you
|
237 |
|
|
specify the single command-line option @option{-M}, you can control it
|
238 |
|
|
with a script supplied via standard input, like the MRI ``librarian''
|
239 |
|
|
program.
|
240 |
|
|
|
241 |
|
|
@c man end
|
242 |
|
|
|
243 |
|
|
@menu
|
244 |
|
|
* ar cmdline:: Controlling @command{ar} on the command line
|
245 |
|
|
* ar scripts:: Controlling @command{ar} with a script
|
246 |
|
|
@end menu
|
247 |
|
|
|
248 |
|
|
@page
|
249 |
|
|
@node ar cmdline
|
250 |
|
|
@section Controlling @command{ar} on the Command Line
|
251 |
|
|
|
252 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
253 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS ar
|
254 |
|
|
ar [@option{--plugin} @var{name}] [@option{-X32_64}] [@option{-}]@var{p}[@var{mod} [@var{relpos}] [@var{count}]] @var{archive} [@var{member}@dots{}]
|
255 |
|
|
@c man end
|
256 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
257 |
|
|
|
258 |
|
|
@cindex Unix compatibility, @command{ar}
|
259 |
|
|
When you use @command{ar} in the Unix style, @command{ar} insists on at least two
|
260 |
|
|
arguments to execute: one keyletter specifying the @emph{operation}
|
261 |
|
|
(optionally accompanied by other keyletters specifying
|
262 |
|
|
@emph{modifiers}), and the archive name to act on.
|
263 |
|
|
|
264 |
|
|
Most operations can also accept further @var{member} arguments,
|
265 |
|
|
specifying particular files to operate on.
|
266 |
|
|
|
267 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS ar
|
268 |
|
|
|
269 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{ar} allows you to mix the operation code @var{p} and modifier
|
270 |
|
|
flags @var{mod} in any order, within the first command-line argument.
|
271 |
|
|
|
272 |
|
|
If you wish, you may begin the first command-line argument with a
|
273 |
|
|
dash.
|
274 |
|
|
|
275 |
|
|
@cindex operations on archive
|
276 |
|
|
The @var{p} keyletter specifies what operation to execute; it may be
|
277 |
|
|
any of the following, but you must specify only one of them:
|
278 |
|
|
|
279 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
280 |
|
|
@item d
|
281 |
|
|
@cindex deleting from archive
|
282 |
|
|
@emph{Delete} modules from the archive. Specify the names of modules to
|
283 |
|
|
be deleted as @var{member}@dots{}; the archive is untouched if you
|
284 |
|
|
specify no files to delete.
|
285 |
|
|
|
286 |
|
|
If you specify the @samp{v} modifier, @command{ar} lists each module
|
287 |
|
|
as it is deleted.
|
288 |
|
|
|
289 |
|
|
@item m
|
290 |
|
|
@cindex moving in archive
|
291 |
|
|
Use this operation to @emph{move} members in an archive.
|
292 |
|
|
|
293 |
|
|
The ordering of members in an archive can make a difference in how
|
294 |
|
|
programs are linked using the library, if a symbol is defined in more
|
295 |
|
|
than one member.
|
296 |
|
|
|
297 |
|
|
If no modifiers are used with @code{m}, any members you name in the
|
298 |
|
|
@var{member} arguments are moved to the @emph{end} of the archive;
|
299 |
|
|
you can use the @samp{a}, @samp{b}, or @samp{i} modifiers to move them to a
|
300 |
|
|
specified place instead.
|
301 |
|
|
|
302 |
|
|
@item p
|
303 |
|
|
@cindex printing from archive
|
304 |
|
|
@emph{Print} the specified members of the archive, to the standard
|
305 |
|
|
output file. If the @samp{v} modifier is specified, show the member
|
306 |
|
|
name before copying its contents to standard output.
|
307 |
|
|
|
308 |
|
|
If you specify no @var{member} arguments, all the files in the archive are
|
309 |
|
|
printed.
|
310 |
|
|
|
311 |
|
|
@item q
|
312 |
|
|
@cindex quick append to archive
|
313 |
|
|
@emph{Quick append}; Historically, add the files @var{member}@dots{} to the end of
|
314 |
|
|
@var{archive}, without checking for replacement.
|
315 |
|
|
|
316 |
|
|
The modifiers @samp{a}, @samp{b}, and @samp{i} do @emph{not} affect this
|
317 |
|
|
operation; new members are always placed at the end of the archive.
|
318 |
|
|
|
319 |
|
|
The modifier @samp{v} makes @command{ar} list each file as it is appended.
|
320 |
|
|
|
321 |
|
|
Since the point of this operation is speed, the archive's symbol table
|
322 |
|
|
index is not updated, even if it already existed; you can use @samp{ar s} or
|
323 |
|
|
@command{ranlib} explicitly to update the symbol table index.
|
324 |
|
|
|
325 |
|
|
However, too many different systems assume quick append rebuilds the
|
326 |
|
|
index, so @sc{gnu} @command{ar} implements @samp{q} as a synonym for @samp{r}.
|
327 |
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
@item r
|
329 |
|
|
@cindex replacement in archive
|
330 |
|
|
Insert the files @var{member}@dots{} into @var{archive} (with
|
331 |
|
|
@emph{replacement}). This operation differs from @samp{q} in that any
|
332 |
|
|
previously existing members are deleted if their names match those being
|
333 |
|
|
added.
|
334 |
|
|
|
335 |
|
|
If one of the files named in @var{member}@dots{} does not exist, @command{ar}
|
336 |
|
|
displays an error message, and leaves undisturbed any existing members
|
337 |
|
|
of the archive matching that name.
|
338 |
|
|
|
339 |
|
|
By default, new members are added at the end of the file; but you may
|
340 |
|
|
use one of the modifiers @samp{a}, @samp{b}, or @samp{i} to request
|
341 |
|
|
placement relative to some existing member.
|
342 |
|
|
|
343 |
|
|
The modifier @samp{v} used with this operation elicits a line of
|
344 |
|
|
output for each file inserted, along with one of the letters @samp{a} or
|
345 |
|
|
@samp{r} to indicate whether the file was appended (no old member
|
346 |
|
|
deleted) or replaced.
|
347 |
|
|
|
348 |
|
|
@item s
|
349 |
|
|
@cindex ranlib
|
350 |
|
|
Add an index to the archive, or update it if it already exists. Note
|
351 |
|
|
this command is an exception to the rule that there can only be one
|
352 |
|
|
command letter, as it is possible to use it as either a command or a
|
353 |
|
|
modifier. In either case it does the same thing.
|
354 |
|
|
|
355 |
|
|
@item t
|
356 |
|
|
@cindex contents of archive
|
357 |
|
|
Display a @emph{table} listing the contents of @var{archive}, or those
|
358 |
|
|
of the files listed in @var{member}@dots{} that are present in the
|
359 |
|
|
archive. Normally only the member name is shown; if you also want to
|
360 |
|
|
see the modes (permissions), timestamp, owner, group, and size, you can
|
361 |
|
|
request that by also specifying the @samp{v} modifier.
|
362 |
|
|
|
363 |
|
|
If you do not specify a @var{member}, all files in the archive
|
364 |
|
|
are listed.
|
365 |
|
|
|
366 |
|
|
@cindex repeated names in archive
|
367 |
|
|
@cindex name duplication in archive
|
368 |
|
|
If there is more than one file with the same name (say, @samp{fie}) in
|
369 |
|
|
an archive (say @samp{b.a}), @samp{ar t b.a fie} lists only the
|
370 |
|
|
first instance; to see them all, you must ask for a complete
|
371 |
|
|
listing---in our example, @samp{ar t b.a}.
|
372 |
|
|
@c WRS only; per Gumby, this is implementation-dependent, and in a more
|
373 |
|
|
@c recent case in fact works the other way.
|
374 |
|
|
|
375 |
|
|
@item x
|
376 |
|
|
@cindex extract from archive
|
377 |
|
|
@emph{Extract} members (named @var{member}) from the archive. You can
|
378 |
|
|
use the @samp{v} modifier with this operation, to request that
|
379 |
|
|
@command{ar} list each name as it extracts it.
|
380 |
|
|
|
381 |
|
|
If you do not specify a @var{member}, all files in the archive
|
382 |
|
|
are extracted.
|
383 |
|
|
|
384 |
|
|
Files cannot be extracted from a thin archive.
|
385 |
|
|
|
386 |
|
|
@end table
|
387 |
|
|
|
388 |
|
|
A number of modifiers (@var{mod}) may immediately follow the @var{p}
|
389 |
|
|
keyletter, to specify variations on an operation's behavior:
|
390 |
|
|
|
391 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
392 |
|
|
@item a
|
393 |
|
|
@cindex relative placement in archive
|
394 |
|
|
Add new files @emph{after} an existing member of the
|
395 |
|
|
archive. If you use the modifier @samp{a}, the name of an existing archive
|
396 |
|
|
member must be present as the @var{relpos} argument, before the
|
397 |
|
|
@var{archive} specification.
|
398 |
|
|
|
399 |
|
|
@item b
|
400 |
|
|
Add new files @emph{before} an existing member of the
|
401 |
|
|
archive. If you use the modifier @samp{b}, the name of an existing archive
|
402 |
|
|
member must be present as the @var{relpos} argument, before the
|
403 |
|
|
@var{archive} specification. (same as @samp{i}).
|
404 |
|
|
|
405 |
|
|
@item c
|
406 |
|
|
@cindex creating archives
|
407 |
|
|
@emph{Create} the archive. The specified @var{archive} is always
|
408 |
|
|
created if it did not exist, when you request an update. But a warning is
|
409 |
|
|
issued unless you specify in advance that you expect to create it, by
|
410 |
|
|
using this modifier.
|
411 |
|
|
|
412 |
|
|
@item D
|
413 |
|
|
@cindex deterministic archives
|
414 |
|
|
Operate in @emph{deterministic} mode. When adding files and the archive
|
415 |
|
|
index use zero for UIDs, GIDs, timestamps, and use consistent file modes
|
416 |
|
|
for all files. When this option is used, if @command{ar} is used with
|
417 |
|
|
identical options and identical input files, multiple runs will create
|
418 |
|
|
identical output files regardless of the input files' owners, groups,
|
419 |
|
|
file modes, or modification times.
|
420 |
|
|
|
421 |
|
|
@item f
|
422 |
|
|
Truncate names in the archive. @sc{gnu} @command{ar} will normally permit file
|
423 |
|
|
names of any length. This will cause it to create archives which are
|
424 |
|
|
not compatible with the native @command{ar} program on some systems. If
|
425 |
|
|
this is a concern, the @samp{f} modifier may be used to truncate file
|
426 |
|
|
names when putting them in the archive.
|
427 |
|
|
|
428 |
|
|
@item i
|
429 |
|
|
Insert new files @emph{before} an existing member of the
|
430 |
|
|
archive. If you use the modifier @samp{i}, the name of an existing archive
|
431 |
|
|
member must be present as the @var{relpos} argument, before the
|
432 |
|
|
@var{archive} specification. (same as @samp{b}).
|
433 |
|
|
|
434 |
|
|
@item l
|
435 |
|
|
This modifier is accepted but not used.
|
436 |
|
|
@c whaffor ar l modifier??? presumably compat; with
|
437 |
|
|
@c what???---doc@@cygnus.com, 25jan91
|
438 |
|
|
|
439 |
|
|
@item N
|
440 |
|
|
Uses the @var{count} parameter. This is used if there are multiple
|
441 |
|
|
entries in the archive with the same name. Extract or delete instance
|
442 |
|
|
@var{count} of the given name from the archive.
|
443 |
|
|
|
444 |
|
|
@item o
|
445 |
|
|
@cindex dates in archive
|
446 |
|
|
Preserve the @emph{original} dates of members when extracting them. If
|
447 |
|
|
you do not specify this modifier, files extracted from the archive
|
448 |
|
|
are stamped with the time of extraction.
|
449 |
|
|
|
450 |
|
|
@item P
|
451 |
|
|
Use the full path name when matching names in the archive. @sc{gnu}
|
452 |
|
|
@command{ar} can not create an archive with a full path name (such archives
|
453 |
|
|
are not POSIX complaint), but other archive creators can. This option
|
454 |
|
|
will cause @sc{gnu} @command{ar} to match file names using a complete path
|
455 |
|
|
name, which can be convenient when extracting a single file from an
|
456 |
|
|
archive created by another tool.
|
457 |
|
|
|
458 |
|
|
@item s
|
459 |
|
|
@cindex writing archive index
|
460 |
|
|
Write an object-file index into the archive, or update an existing one,
|
461 |
|
|
even if no other change is made to the archive. You may use this modifier
|
462 |
|
|
flag either with any operation, or alone. Running @samp{ar s} on an
|
463 |
|
|
archive is equivalent to running @samp{ranlib} on it.
|
464 |
|
|
|
465 |
|
|
@item S
|
466 |
|
|
@cindex not writing archive index
|
467 |
|
|
Do not generate an archive symbol table. This can speed up building a
|
468 |
|
|
large library in several steps. The resulting archive can not be used
|
469 |
|
|
with the linker. In order to build a symbol table, you must omit the
|
470 |
|
|
@samp{S} modifier on the last execution of @samp{ar}, or you must run
|
471 |
|
|
@samp{ranlib} on the archive.
|
472 |
|
|
|
473 |
|
|
@item T
|
474 |
|
|
@cindex creating thin archive
|
475 |
|
|
Make the specified @var{archive} a @emph{thin} archive. If it already
|
476 |
|
|
exists and is a regular archive, the existing members must be present
|
477 |
|
|
in the same directory as @var{archive}.
|
478 |
|
|
|
479 |
|
|
@item u
|
480 |
|
|
@cindex updating an archive
|
481 |
|
|
Normally, @samp{ar r}@dots{} inserts all files
|
482 |
|
|
listed into the archive. If you would like to insert @emph{only} those
|
483 |
|
|
of the files you list that are newer than existing members of the same
|
484 |
|
|
names, use this modifier. The @samp{u} modifier is allowed only for the
|
485 |
|
|
operation @samp{r} (replace). In particular, the combination @samp{qu} is
|
486 |
|
|
not allowed, since checking the timestamps would lose any speed
|
487 |
|
|
advantage from the operation @samp{q}.
|
488 |
|
|
|
489 |
|
|
@item v
|
490 |
|
|
This modifier requests the @emph{verbose} version of an operation. Many
|
491 |
|
|
operations display additional information, such as filenames processed,
|
492 |
|
|
when the modifier @samp{v} is appended.
|
493 |
|
|
|
494 |
|
|
@item V
|
495 |
|
|
This modifier shows the version number of @command{ar}.
|
496 |
|
|
@end table
|
497 |
|
|
|
498 |
|
|
@command{ar} ignores an initial option spelt @samp{-X32_64}, for
|
499 |
|
|
compatibility with AIX. The behaviour produced by this option is the
|
500 |
|
|
default for @sc{gnu} @command{ar}. @command{ar} does not support any of the other
|
501 |
|
|
@samp{-X} options; in particular, it does not support @option{-X32}
|
502 |
|
|
which is the default for AIX @command{ar}.
|
503 |
|
|
|
504 |
|
|
The optional command line switch @option{--plugin} @var{name} causes
|
505 |
|
|
@command{ar} to load the plugin called @var{name} which adds support
|
506 |
|
|
for more file formats. This option is only available if the toolchain
|
507 |
|
|
has been built with plugin support enabled.
|
508 |
|
|
|
509 |
|
|
@c man end
|
510 |
|
|
|
511 |
|
|
@ignore
|
512 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO ar
|
513 |
|
|
nm(1), ranlib(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
514 |
|
|
@c man end
|
515 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
516 |
|
|
|
517 |
|
|
@node ar scripts
|
518 |
|
|
@section Controlling @command{ar} with a Script
|
519 |
|
|
|
520 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
521 |
|
|
ar -M [ <@var{script} ]
|
522 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
523 |
|
|
|
524 |
|
|
@cindex MRI compatibility, @command{ar}
|
525 |
|
|
@cindex scripts, @command{ar}
|
526 |
|
|
If you use the single command-line option @samp{-M} with @command{ar}, you
|
527 |
|
|
can control its operation with a rudimentary command language. This
|
528 |
|
|
form of @command{ar} operates interactively if standard input is coming
|
529 |
|
|
directly from a terminal. During interactive use, @command{ar} prompts for
|
530 |
|
|
input (the prompt is @samp{AR >}), and continues executing even after
|
531 |
|
|
errors. If you redirect standard input to a script file, no prompts are
|
532 |
|
|
issued, and @command{ar} abandons execution (with a nonzero exit code)
|
533 |
|
|
on any error.
|
534 |
|
|
|
535 |
|
|
The @command{ar} command language is @emph{not} designed to be equivalent
|
536 |
|
|
to the command-line options; in fact, it provides somewhat less control
|
537 |
|
|
over archives. The only purpose of the command language is to ease the
|
538 |
|
|
transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ar} for developers who already have scripts
|
539 |
|
|
written for the MRI ``librarian'' program.
|
540 |
|
|
|
541 |
|
|
The syntax for the @command{ar} command language is straightforward:
|
542 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
543 |
|
|
@item
|
544 |
|
|
commands are recognized in upper or lower case; for example, @code{LIST}
|
545 |
|
|
is the same as @code{list}. In the following descriptions, commands are
|
546 |
|
|
shown in upper case for clarity.
|
547 |
|
|
|
548 |
|
|
@item
|
549 |
|
|
a single command may appear on each line; it is the first word on the
|
550 |
|
|
line.
|
551 |
|
|
|
552 |
|
|
@item
|
553 |
|
|
empty lines are allowed, and have no effect.
|
554 |
|
|
|
555 |
|
|
@item
|
556 |
|
|
comments are allowed; text after either of the characters @samp{*}
|
557 |
|
|
or @samp{;} is ignored.
|
558 |
|
|
|
559 |
|
|
@item
|
560 |
|
|
Whenever you use a list of names as part of the argument to an @command{ar}
|
561 |
|
|
command, you can separate the individual names with either commas or
|
562 |
|
|
blanks. Commas are shown in the explanations below, for clarity.
|
563 |
|
|
|
564 |
|
|
@item
|
565 |
|
|
@samp{+} is used as a line continuation character; if @samp{+} appears
|
566 |
|
|
at the end of a line, the text on the following line is considered part
|
567 |
|
|
of the current command.
|
568 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
569 |
|
|
|
570 |
|
|
Here are the commands you can use in @command{ar} scripts, or when using
|
571 |
|
|
@command{ar} interactively. Three of them have special significance:
|
572 |
|
|
|
573 |
|
|
@code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE} specify a @dfn{current archive}, which is
|
574 |
|
|
a temporary file required for most of the other commands.
|
575 |
|
|
|
576 |
|
|
@code{SAVE} commits the changes so far specified by the script. Prior
|
577 |
|
|
to @code{SAVE}, commands affect only the temporary copy of the current
|
578 |
|
|
archive.
|
579 |
|
|
|
580 |
|
|
@table @code
|
581 |
|
|
@item ADDLIB @var{archive}
|
582 |
|
|
@itemx ADDLIB @var{archive} (@var{module}, @var{module}, @dots{} @var{module})
|
583 |
|
|
Add all the contents of @var{archive} (or, if specified, each named
|
584 |
|
|
@var{module} from @var{archive}) to the current archive.
|
585 |
|
|
|
586 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
587 |
|
|
|
588 |
|
|
@item ADDMOD @var{member}, @var{member}, @dots{} @var{member}
|
589 |
|
|
@c FIXME! w/Replacement?? If so, like "ar r @var{archive} @var{names}"
|
590 |
|
|
@c else like "ar q..."
|
591 |
|
|
Add each named @var{member} as a module in the current archive.
|
592 |
|
|
|
593 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
594 |
|
|
|
595 |
|
|
@item CLEAR
|
596 |
|
|
Discard the contents of the current archive, canceling the effect of
|
597 |
|
|
any operations since the last @code{SAVE}. May be executed (with no
|
598 |
|
|
effect) even if no current archive is specified.
|
599 |
|
|
|
600 |
|
|
@item CREATE @var{archive}
|
601 |
|
|
Creates an archive, and makes it the current archive (required for many
|
602 |
|
|
other commands). The new archive is created with a temporary name; it
|
603 |
|
|
is not actually saved as @var{archive} until you use @code{SAVE}.
|
604 |
|
|
You can overwrite existing archives; similarly, the contents of any
|
605 |
|
|
existing file named @var{archive} will not be destroyed until @code{SAVE}.
|
606 |
|
|
|
607 |
|
|
@item DELETE @var{module}, @var{module}, @dots{} @var{module}
|
608 |
|
|
Delete each listed @var{module} from the current archive; equivalent to
|
609 |
|
|
@samp{ar -d @var{archive} @var{module} @dots{} @var{module}}.
|
610 |
|
|
|
611 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
612 |
|
|
|
613 |
|
|
@item DIRECTORY @var{archive} (@var{module}, @dots{} @var{module})
|
614 |
|
|
@itemx DIRECTORY @var{archive} (@var{module}, @dots{} @var{module}) @var{outputfile}
|
615 |
|
|
List each named @var{module} present in @var{archive}. The separate
|
616 |
|
|
command @code{VERBOSE} specifies the form of the output: when verbose
|
617 |
|
|
output is off, output is like that of @samp{ar -t @var{archive}
|
618 |
|
|
@var{module}@dots{}}. When verbose output is on, the listing is like
|
619 |
|
|
@samp{ar -tv @var{archive} @var{module}@dots{}}.
|
620 |
|
|
|
621 |
|
|
Output normally goes to the standard output stream; however, if you
|
622 |
|
|
specify @var{outputfile} as a final argument, @command{ar} directs the
|
623 |
|
|
output to that file.
|
624 |
|
|
|
625 |
|
|
@item END
|
626 |
|
|
Exit from @command{ar}, with a @code{0} exit code to indicate successful
|
627 |
|
|
completion. This command does not save the output file; if you have
|
628 |
|
|
changed the current archive since the last @code{SAVE} command, those
|
629 |
|
|
changes are lost.
|
630 |
|
|
|
631 |
|
|
@item EXTRACT @var{module}, @var{module}, @dots{} @var{module}
|
632 |
|
|
Extract each named @var{module} from the current archive, writing them
|
633 |
|
|
into the current directory as separate files. Equivalent to @samp{ar -x
|
634 |
|
|
@var{archive} @var{module}@dots{}}.
|
635 |
|
|
|
636 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
637 |
|
|
|
638 |
|
|
@ignore
|
639 |
|
|
@c FIXME Tokens but no commands???
|
640 |
|
|
@item FULLDIR
|
641 |
|
|
|
642 |
|
|
@item HELP
|
643 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
644 |
|
|
|
645 |
|
|
@item LIST
|
646 |
|
|
Display full contents of the current archive, in ``verbose'' style
|
647 |
|
|
regardless of the state of @code{VERBOSE}. The effect is like @samp{ar
|
648 |
|
|
tv @var{archive}}. (This single command is a @sc{gnu} @command{ar}
|
649 |
|
|
enhancement, rather than present for MRI compatibility.)
|
650 |
|
|
|
651 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
652 |
|
|
|
653 |
|
|
@item OPEN @var{archive}
|
654 |
|
|
Opens an existing archive for use as the current archive (required for
|
655 |
|
|
many other commands). Any changes as the result of subsequent commands
|
656 |
|
|
will not actually affect @var{archive} until you next use @code{SAVE}.
|
657 |
|
|
|
658 |
|
|
@item REPLACE @var{module}, @var{module}, @dots{} @var{module}
|
659 |
|
|
In the current archive, replace each existing @var{module} (named in
|
660 |
|
|
the @code{REPLACE} arguments) from files in the current working directory.
|
661 |
|
|
To execute this command without errors, both the file, and the module in
|
662 |
|
|
the current archive, must exist.
|
663 |
|
|
|
664 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
665 |
|
|
|
666 |
|
|
@item VERBOSE
|
667 |
|
|
Toggle an internal flag governing the output from @code{DIRECTORY}.
|
668 |
|
|
When the flag is on, @code{DIRECTORY} output matches output from
|
669 |
|
|
@samp{ar -tv }@dots{}.
|
670 |
|
|
|
671 |
|
|
@item SAVE
|
672 |
|
|
Commit your changes to the current archive, and actually save it as a
|
673 |
|
|
file with the name specified in the last @code{CREATE} or @code{OPEN}
|
674 |
|
|
command.
|
675 |
|
|
|
676 |
|
|
Requires prior use of @code{OPEN} or @code{CREATE}.
|
677 |
|
|
|
678 |
|
|
@end table
|
679 |
|
|
|
680 |
|
|
@iftex
|
681 |
|
|
@node ld
|
682 |
|
|
@chapter ld
|
683 |
|
|
@cindex linker
|
684 |
|
|
@kindex ld
|
685 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is now described in a separate manual.
|
686 |
|
|
@xref{Top,, Overview,, Using LD: the @sc{gnu} linker}.
|
687 |
|
|
@end iftex
|
688 |
|
|
|
689 |
|
|
@node nm
|
690 |
|
|
@chapter nm
|
691 |
|
|
@cindex symbols
|
692 |
|
|
@kindex nm
|
693 |
|
|
|
694 |
|
|
@c man title nm list symbols from object files
|
695 |
|
|
|
696 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
697 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS nm
|
698 |
|
|
nm [@option{-a}|@option{--debug-syms}]
|
699 |
|
|
[@option{-g}|@option{--extern-only}][@option{--plugin} @var{name}]
|
700 |
|
|
[@option{-B}] [@option{-C}|@option{--demangle}[=@var{style}]] [@option{-D}|@option{--dynamic}]
|
701 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{--print-size}] [@option{-s}|@option{--print-armap}]
|
702 |
|
|
[@option{-A}|@option{-o}|@option{--print-file-name}][@option{--special-syms}]
|
703 |
|
|
[@option{-n}|@option{-v}|@option{--numeric-sort}] [@option{-p}|@option{--no-sort}]
|
704 |
|
|
[@option{-r}|@option{--reverse-sort}] [@option{--size-sort}] [@option{-u}|@option{--undefined-only}]
|
705 |
|
|
[@option{-t} @var{radix}|@option{--radix=}@var{radix}] [@option{-P}|@option{--portability}]
|
706 |
|
|
[@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}] [@option{-f}@var{format}|@option{--format=}@var{format}]
|
707 |
|
|
[@option{--defined-only}] [@option{-l}|@option{--line-numbers}] [@option{--no-demangle}]
|
708 |
|
|
[@option{-V}|@option{--version}] [@option{-X 32_64}] [@option{--help}] [@var{objfile}@dots{}]
|
709 |
|
|
@c man end
|
710 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
711 |
|
|
|
712 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION nm
|
713 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{nm} lists the symbols from object files @var{objfile}@dots{}.
|
714 |
|
|
If no object files are listed as arguments, @command{nm} assumes the file
|
715 |
|
|
@file{a.out}.
|
716 |
|
|
|
717 |
|
|
For each symbol, @command{nm} shows:
|
718 |
|
|
|
719 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
720 |
|
|
@item
|
721 |
|
|
The symbol value, in the radix selected by options (see below), or
|
722 |
|
|
hexadecimal by default.
|
723 |
|
|
|
724 |
|
|
@item
|
725 |
|
|
The symbol type. At least the following types are used; others are, as
|
726 |
|
|
well, depending on the object file format. If lowercase, the symbol is
|
727 |
|
|
usually local; if uppercase, the symbol is global (external). There
|
728 |
|
|
are however a few lowercase symbols that are shown for special global
|
729 |
|
|
symbols (@code{u}, @code{v} and @code{w}).
|
730 |
|
|
|
731 |
|
|
@c Some more detail on exactly what these symbol types are used for
|
732 |
|
|
@c would be nice.
|
733 |
|
|
@table @code
|
734 |
|
|
@item A
|
735 |
|
|
The symbol's value is absolute, and will not be changed by further
|
736 |
|
|
linking.
|
737 |
|
|
|
738 |
|
|
@item B
|
739 |
|
|
@itemx b
|
740 |
|
|
The symbol is in the uninitialized data section (known as BSS).
|
741 |
|
|
|
742 |
|
|
@item C
|
743 |
|
|
The symbol is common. Common symbols are uninitialized data. When
|
744 |
|
|
linking, multiple common symbols may appear with the same name. If the
|
745 |
|
|
symbol is defined anywhere, the common symbols are treated as undefined
|
746 |
|
|
references.
|
747 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
748 |
|
|
For more details on common symbols, see the discussion of
|
749 |
|
|
--warn-common in @ref{Options,,Linker options,ld.info,The GNU linker}.
|
750 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
751 |
|
|
|
752 |
|
|
@item D
|
753 |
|
|
@itemx d
|
754 |
|
|
The symbol is in the initialized data section.
|
755 |
|
|
|
756 |
|
|
@item G
|
757 |
|
|
@itemx g
|
758 |
|
|
The symbol is in an initialized data section for small objects. Some
|
759 |
|
|
object file formats permit more efficient access to small data objects,
|
760 |
|
|
such as a global int variable as opposed to a large global array.
|
761 |
|
|
|
762 |
|
|
@item i
|
763 |
|
|
For PE format files this indicates that the symbol is in a section
|
764 |
|
|
specific to the implementation of DLLs. For ELF format files this
|
765 |
|
|
indicates that the symbol is an indirect function. This is a GNU
|
766 |
|
|
extension to the standard set of ELF symbol types. It indicates a
|
767 |
|
|
symbol which if referenced by a relocation does not evaluate to its
|
768 |
|
|
address, but instead must be invoked at runtime. The runtime
|
769 |
|
|
execution will then return the value to be used in the relocation.
|
770 |
|
|
|
771 |
|
|
@item N
|
772 |
|
|
The symbol is a debugging symbol.
|
773 |
|
|
|
774 |
|
|
@item p
|
775 |
|
|
The symbols is in a stack unwind section.
|
776 |
|
|
|
777 |
|
|
@item R
|
778 |
|
|
@itemx r
|
779 |
|
|
The symbol is in a read only data section.
|
780 |
|
|
|
781 |
|
|
@item S
|
782 |
|
|
@itemx s
|
783 |
|
|
The symbol is in an uninitialized data section for small objects.
|
784 |
|
|
|
785 |
|
|
@item T
|
786 |
|
|
@itemx t
|
787 |
|
|
The symbol is in the text (code) section.
|
788 |
|
|
|
789 |
|
|
@item U
|
790 |
|
|
The symbol is undefined.
|
791 |
|
|
|
792 |
|
|
@item u
|
793 |
|
|
The symbol is a unique global symbol. This is a GNU extension to the
|
794 |
|
|
standard set of ELF symbol bindings. For such a symbol the dynamic linker
|
795 |
|
|
will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with
|
796 |
|
|
this name and type in use.
|
797 |
|
|
|
798 |
|
|
@item V
|
799 |
|
|
@itemx v
|
800 |
|
|
The symbol is a weak object. When a weak defined symbol is linked with
|
801 |
|
|
a normal defined symbol, the normal defined symbol is used with no error.
|
802 |
|
|
When a weak undefined symbol is linked and the symbol is not defined,
|
803 |
|
|
the value of the weak symbol becomes zero with no error. On some
|
804 |
|
|
systems, uppercase indicates that a default value has been specified.
|
805 |
|
|
|
806 |
|
|
@item W
|
807 |
|
|
@itemx w
|
808 |
|
|
The symbol is a weak symbol that has not been specifically tagged as a
|
809 |
|
|
weak object symbol. When a weak defined symbol is linked with a normal
|
810 |
|
|
defined symbol, the normal defined symbol is used with no error.
|
811 |
|
|
When a weak undefined symbol is linked and the symbol is not defined,
|
812 |
|
|
the value of the symbol is determined in a system-specific manner without
|
813 |
|
|
error. On some systems, uppercase indicates that a default value has been
|
814 |
|
|
specified.
|
815 |
|
|
|
816 |
|
|
@item -
|
817 |
|
|
The symbol is a stabs symbol in an a.out object file. In this case, the
|
818 |
|
|
next values printed are the stabs other field, the stabs desc field, and
|
819 |
|
|
the stab type. Stabs symbols are used to hold debugging information.
|
820 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
821 |
|
|
For more information, see @ref{Top,Stabs,Stabs Overview,stabs.info, The
|
822 |
|
|
``stabs'' debug format}.
|
823 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
824 |
|
|
|
825 |
|
|
@item ?
|
826 |
|
|
The symbol type is unknown, or object file format specific.
|
827 |
|
|
@end table
|
828 |
|
|
|
829 |
|
|
@item
|
830 |
|
|
The symbol name.
|
831 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
832 |
|
|
|
833 |
|
|
@c man end
|
834 |
|
|
|
835 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS nm
|
836 |
|
|
The long and short forms of options, shown here as alternatives, are
|
837 |
|
|
equivalent.
|
838 |
|
|
|
839 |
|
|
@table @env
|
840 |
|
|
@item -A
|
841 |
|
|
@itemx -o
|
842 |
|
|
@itemx --print-file-name
|
843 |
|
|
@cindex input file name
|
844 |
|
|
@cindex file name
|
845 |
|
|
@cindex source file name
|
846 |
|
|
Precede each symbol by the name of the input file (or archive member)
|
847 |
|
|
in which it was found, rather than identifying the input file once only,
|
848 |
|
|
before all of its symbols.
|
849 |
|
|
|
850 |
|
|
@item -a
|
851 |
|
|
@itemx --debug-syms
|
852 |
|
|
@cindex debugging symbols
|
853 |
|
|
Display all symbols, even debugger-only symbols; normally these are not
|
854 |
|
|
listed.
|
855 |
|
|
|
856 |
|
|
@item -B
|
857 |
|
|
@cindex @command{nm} format
|
858 |
|
|
@cindex @command{nm} compatibility
|
859 |
|
|
The same as @option{--format=bsd} (for compatibility with the MIPS @command{nm}).
|
860 |
|
|
|
861 |
|
|
@item -C
|
862 |
|
|
@itemx --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
863 |
|
|
@cindex demangling in nm
|
864 |
|
|
Decode (@dfn{demangle}) low-level symbol names into user-level names.
|
865 |
|
|
Besides removing any initial underscore prepended by the system, this
|
866 |
|
|
makes C++ function names readable. Different compilers have different
|
867 |
|
|
mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used to
|
868 |
|
|
choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. @xref{c++filt},
|
869 |
|
|
for more information on demangling.
|
870 |
|
|
|
871 |
|
|
@item --no-demangle
|
872 |
|
|
Do not demangle low-level symbol names. This is the default.
|
873 |
|
|
|
874 |
|
|
@item -D
|
875 |
|
|
@itemx --dynamic
|
876 |
|
|
@cindex dynamic symbols
|
877 |
|
|
Display the dynamic symbols rather than the normal symbols. This is
|
878 |
|
|
only meaningful for dynamic objects, such as certain types of shared
|
879 |
|
|
libraries.
|
880 |
|
|
|
881 |
|
|
@item -f @var{format}
|
882 |
|
|
@itemx --format=@var{format}
|
883 |
|
|
@cindex @command{nm} format
|
884 |
|
|
@cindex @command{nm} compatibility
|
885 |
|
|
Use the output format @var{format}, which can be @code{bsd},
|
886 |
|
|
@code{sysv}, or @code{posix}. The default is @code{bsd}.
|
887 |
|
|
Only the first character of @var{format} is significant; it can be
|
888 |
|
|
either upper or lower case.
|
889 |
|
|
|
890 |
|
|
@item -g
|
891 |
|
|
@itemx --extern-only
|
892 |
|
|
@cindex external symbols
|
893 |
|
|
Display only external symbols.
|
894 |
|
|
|
895 |
|
|
@item --plugin @var{name}
|
896 |
|
|
@cindex load plugin
|
897 |
|
|
Load the plugin called @var{name} to add support for extra target
|
898 |
|
|
types. This option is only available if the toolchain has been built
|
899 |
|
|
with plugin support enabled.
|
900 |
|
|
|
901 |
|
|
@item -l
|
902 |
|
|
@itemx --line-numbers
|
903 |
|
|
@cindex symbol line numbers
|
904 |
|
|
For each symbol, use debugging information to try to find a filename and
|
905 |
|
|
line number. For a defined symbol, look for the line number of the
|
906 |
|
|
address of the symbol. For an undefined symbol, look for the line
|
907 |
|
|
number of a relocation entry which refers to the symbol. If line number
|
908 |
|
|
information can be found, print it after the other symbol information.
|
909 |
|
|
|
910 |
|
|
@item -n
|
911 |
|
|
@itemx -v
|
912 |
|
|
@itemx --numeric-sort
|
913 |
|
|
Sort symbols numerically by their addresses, rather than alphabetically
|
914 |
|
|
by their names.
|
915 |
|
|
|
916 |
|
|
@item -p
|
917 |
|
|
@itemx --no-sort
|
918 |
|
|
@cindex sorting symbols
|
919 |
|
|
Do not bother to sort the symbols in any order; print them in the order
|
920 |
|
|
encountered.
|
921 |
|
|
|
922 |
|
|
@item -P
|
923 |
|
|
@itemx --portability
|
924 |
|
|
Use the POSIX.2 standard output format instead of the default format.
|
925 |
|
|
Equivalent to @samp{-f posix}.
|
926 |
|
|
|
927 |
|
|
@item -S
|
928 |
|
|
@itemx --print-size
|
929 |
|
|
Print both value and size of defined symbols for the @code{bsd} output style.
|
930 |
|
|
This option has no effect for object formats that do not record symbol
|
931 |
|
|
sizes, unless @samp{--size-sort} is also used in which case a
|
932 |
|
|
calculated size is displayed.
|
933 |
|
|
|
934 |
|
|
@item -s
|
935 |
|
|
@itemx --print-armap
|
936 |
|
|
@cindex symbol index, listing
|
937 |
|
|
When listing symbols from archive members, include the index: a mapping
|
938 |
|
|
(stored in the archive by @command{ar} or @command{ranlib}) of which modules
|
939 |
|
|
contain definitions for which names.
|
940 |
|
|
|
941 |
|
|
@item -r
|
942 |
|
|
@itemx --reverse-sort
|
943 |
|
|
Reverse the order of the sort (whether numeric or alphabetic); let the
|
944 |
|
|
last come first.
|
945 |
|
|
|
946 |
|
|
@item --size-sort
|
947 |
|
|
Sort symbols by size. The size is computed as the difference between
|
948 |
|
|
the value of the symbol and the value of the symbol with the next higher
|
949 |
|
|
value. If the @code{bsd} output format is used the size of the symbol
|
950 |
|
|
is printed, rather than the value, and @samp{-S} must be used in order
|
951 |
|
|
both size and value to be printed.
|
952 |
|
|
|
953 |
|
|
@item --special-syms
|
954 |
|
|
Display symbols which have a target-specific special meaning. These
|
955 |
|
|
symbols are usually used by the target for some special processing and
|
956 |
|
|
are not normally helpful when included included in the normal symbol
|
957 |
|
|
lists. For example for ARM targets this option would skip the mapping
|
958 |
|
|
symbols used to mark transitions between ARM code, THUMB code and
|
959 |
|
|
data.
|
960 |
|
|
|
961 |
|
|
@item -t @var{radix}
|
962 |
|
|
@itemx --radix=@var{radix}
|
963 |
|
|
Use @var{radix} as the radix for printing the symbol values. It must be
|
964 |
|
|
@samp{d} for decimal, @samp{o} for octal, or @samp{x} for hexadecimal.
|
965 |
|
|
|
966 |
|
|
@item --target=@var{bfdname}
|
967 |
|
|
@cindex object code format
|
968 |
|
|
Specify an object code format other than your system's default format.
|
969 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
970 |
|
|
|
971 |
|
|
@item -u
|
972 |
|
|
@itemx --undefined-only
|
973 |
|
|
@cindex external symbols
|
974 |
|
|
@cindex undefined symbols
|
975 |
|
|
Display only undefined symbols (those external to each object file).
|
976 |
|
|
|
977 |
|
|
@item --defined-only
|
978 |
|
|
@cindex external symbols
|
979 |
|
|
@cindex undefined symbols
|
980 |
|
|
Display only defined symbols for each object file.
|
981 |
|
|
|
982 |
|
|
@item -V
|
983 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
984 |
|
|
Show the version number of @command{nm} and exit.
|
985 |
|
|
|
986 |
|
|
@item -X
|
987 |
|
|
This option is ignored for compatibility with the AIX version of
|
988 |
|
|
@command{nm}. It takes one parameter which must be the string
|
989 |
|
|
@option{32_64}. The default mode of AIX @command{nm} corresponds
|
990 |
|
|
to @option{-X 32}, which is not supported by @sc{gnu} @command{nm}.
|
991 |
|
|
|
992 |
|
|
@item --help
|
993 |
|
|
Show a summary of the options to @command{nm} and exit.
|
994 |
|
|
@end table
|
995 |
|
|
|
996 |
|
|
@c man end
|
997 |
|
|
|
998 |
|
|
@ignore
|
999 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO nm
|
1000 |
|
|
ar(1), objdump(1), ranlib(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
1001 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1002 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
1003 |
|
|
|
1004 |
|
|
@node objcopy
|
1005 |
|
|
@chapter objcopy
|
1006 |
|
|
|
1007 |
|
|
@c man title objcopy copy and translate object files
|
1008 |
|
|
|
1009 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1010 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS objcopy
|
1011 |
|
|
objcopy [@option{-F} @var{bfdname}|@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
1012 |
|
|
[@option{-I} @var{bfdname}|@option{--input-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
1013 |
|
|
[@option{-O} @var{bfdname}|@option{--output-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
1014 |
|
|
[@option{-B} @var{bfdarch}|@option{--binary-architecture=}@var{bfdarch}]
|
1015 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{--strip-all}]
|
1016 |
|
|
[@option{-g}|@option{--strip-debug}]
|
1017 |
|
|
[@option{-K} @var{symbolname}|@option{--keep-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1018 |
|
|
[@option{-N} @var{symbolname}|@option{--strip-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1019 |
|
|
[@option{--strip-unneeded-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1020 |
|
|
[@option{-G} @var{symbolname}|@option{--keep-global-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1021 |
|
|
[@option{--localize-hidden}]
|
1022 |
|
|
[@option{-L} @var{symbolname}|@option{--localize-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1023 |
|
|
[@option{--globalize-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1024 |
|
|
[@option{-W} @var{symbolname}|@option{--weaken-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
1025 |
|
|
[@option{-w}|@option{--wildcard}]
|
1026 |
|
|
[@option{-x}|@option{--discard-all}]
|
1027 |
|
|
[@option{-X}|@option{--discard-locals}]
|
1028 |
|
|
[@option{-b} @var{byte}|@option{--byte=}@var{byte}]
|
1029 |
|
|
[@option{-i} [@var{breadth}]|@option{--interleave}[=@var{breadth}]]
|
1030 |
|
|
[@option{--interleave-width=}@var{width}]
|
1031 |
|
|
[@option{-j} @var{sectionname}|@option{--only-section=}@var{sectionname}]
|
1032 |
|
|
[@option{-R} @var{sectionname}|@option{--remove-section=}@var{sectionname}]
|
1033 |
|
|
[@option{-p}|@option{--preserve-dates}]
|
1034 |
|
|
[@option{--debugging}]
|
1035 |
|
|
[@option{--gap-fill=}@var{val}]
|
1036 |
|
|
[@option{--pad-to=}@var{address}]
|
1037 |
|
|
[@option{--set-start=}@var{val}]
|
1038 |
|
|
[@option{--adjust-start=}@var{incr}]
|
1039 |
|
|
[@option{--change-addresses=}@var{incr}]
|
1040 |
|
|
[@option{--change-section-address} @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}]
|
1041 |
|
|
[@option{--change-section-lma} @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}]
|
1042 |
|
|
[@option{--change-section-vma} @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}]
|
1043 |
|
|
[@option{--change-warnings}] [@option{--no-change-warnings}]
|
1044 |
|
|
[@option{--set-section-flags} @var{section}=@var{flags}]
|
1045 |
|
|
[@option{--add-section} @var{sectionname}=@var{filename}]
|
1046 |
|
|
[@option{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}[,@var{flags}]]
|
1047 |
|
|
[@option{--long-section-names} @{enable,disable,keep@}]
|
1048 |
|
|
[@option{--change-leading-char}] [@option{--remove-leading-char}]
|
1049 |
|
|
[@option{--reverse-bytes=}@var{num}]
|
1050 |
|
|
[@option{--srec-len=}@var{ival}] [@option{--srec-forceS3}]
|
1051 |
|
|
[@option{--redefine-sym} @var{old}=@var{new}]
|
1052 |
|
|
[@option{--redefine-syms=}@var{filename}]
|
1053 |
|
|
[@option{--weaken}]
|
1054 |
|
|
[@option{--keep-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1055 |
|
|
[@option{--strip-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1056 |
|
|
[@option{--strip-unneeded-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1057 |
|
|
[@option{--keep-global-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1058 |
|
|
[@option{--localize-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1059 |
|
|
[@option{--globalize-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1060 |
|
|
[@option{--weaken-symbols=}@var{filename}]
|
1061 |
|
|
[@option{--alt-machine-code=}@var{index}]
|
1062 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix-symbols=}@var{string}]
|
1063 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix-sections=}@var{string}]
|
1064 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix-alloc-sections=}@var{string}]
|
1065 |
|
|
[@option{--add-gnu-debuglink=}@var{path-to-file}]
|
1066 |
|
|
[@option{--keep-file-symbols}]
|
1067 |
|
|
[@option{--only-keep-debug}]
|
1068 |
|
|
[@option{--extract-symbol}]
|
1069 |
|
|
[@option{--writable-text}]
|
1070 |
|
|
[@option{--readonly-text}]
|
1071 |
|
|
[@option{--pure}]
|
1072 |
|
|
[@option{--impure}]
|
1073 |
|
|
[@option{--file-alignment=}@var{num}]
|
1074 |
|
|
[@option{--heap=}@var{size}]
|
1075 |
|
|
[@option{--image-base=}@var{address}]
|
1076 |
|
|
[@option{--section-alignment=}@var{num}]
|
1077 |
|
|
[@option{--stack=}@var{size}]
|
1078 |
|
|
[@option{--subsystem=}@var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}]
|
1079 |
|
|
[@option{--compress-debug-sections}]
|
1080 |
|
|
[@option{--decompress-debug-sections}]
|
1081 |
|
|
[@option{--dwarf-depth=@var{n}}]
|
1082 |
|
|
[@option{--dwarf-start=@var{n}}]
|
1083 |
|
|
[@option{-v}|@option{--verbose}]
|
1084 |
|
|
[@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
1085 |
|
|
[@option{--help}] [@option{--info}]
|
1086 |
|
|
@var{infile} [@var{outfile}]
|
1087 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1088 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1089 |
|
|
|
1090 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION objcopy
|
1091 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} @command{objcopy} utility copies the contents of an object
|
1092 |
|
|
file to another. @command{objcopy} uses the @sc{gnu} @sc{bfd} Library to
|
1093 |
|
|
read and write the object files. It can write the destination object
|
1094 |
|
|
file in a format different from that of the source object file. The
|
1095 |
|
|
exact behavior of @command{objcopy} is controlled by command-line options.
|
1096 |
|
|
Note that @command{objcopy} should be able to copy a fully linked file
|
1097 |
|
|
between any two formats. However, copying a relocatable object file
|
1098 |
|
|
between any two formats may not work as expected.
|
1099 |
|
|
|
1100 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} creates temporary files to do its translations and
|
1101 |
|
|
deletes them afterward. @command{objcopy} uses @sc{bfd} to do all its
|
1102 |
|
|
translation work; it has access to all the formats described in @sc{bfd}
|
1103 |
|
|
and thus is able to recognize most formats without being told
|
1104 |
|
|
explicitly. @xref{BFD,,BFD,ld.info,Using LD}.
|
1105 |
|
|
|
1106 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} can be used to generate S-records by using an output
|
1107 |
|
|
target of @samp{srec} (e.g., use @samp{-O srec}).
|
1108 |
|
|
|
1109 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} can be used to generate a raw binary file by using an
|
1110 |
|
|
output target of @samp{binary} (e.g., use @option{-O binary}). When
|
1111 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} generates a raw binary file, it will essentially produce
|
1112 |
|
|
a memory dump of the contents of the input object file. All symbols and
|
1113 |
|
|
relocation information will be discarded. The memory dump will start at
|
1114 |
|
|
the load address of the lowest section copied into the output file.
|
1115 |
|
|
|
1116 |
|
|
When generating an S-record or a raw binary file, it may be helpful to
|
1117 |
|
|
use @option{-S} to remove sections containing debugging information. In
|
1118 |
|
|
some cases @option{-R} will be useful to remove sections which contain
|
1119 |
|
|
information that is not needed by the binary file.
|
1120 |
|
|
|
1121 |
|
|
Note---@command{objcopy} is not able to change the endianness of its input
|
1122 |
|
|
files. If the input format has an endianness (some formats do not),
|
1123 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} can only copy the inputs into file formats that have the
|
1124 |
|
|
same endianness or which have no endianness (e.g., @samp{srec}).
|
1125 |
|
|
(However, see the @option{--reverse-bytes} option.)
|
1126 |
|
|
|
1127 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1128 |
|
|
|
1129 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS objcopy
|
1130 |
|
|
|
1131 |
|
|
@table @env
|
1132 |
|
|
@item @var{infile}
|
1133 |
|
|
@itemx @var{outfile}
|
1134 |
|
|
The input and output files, respectively.
|
1135 |
|
|
If you do not specify @var{outfile}, @command{objcopy} creates a
|
1136 |
|
|
temporary file and destructively renames the result with
|
1137 |
|
|
the name of @var{infile}.
|
1138 |
|
|
|
1139 |
|
|
@item -I @var{bfdname}
|
1140 |
|
|
@itemx --input-target=@var{bfdname}
|
1141 |
|
|
Consider the source file's object format to be @var{bfdname}, rather than
|
1142 |
|
|
attempting to deduce it. @xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
1143 |
|
|
|
1144 |
|
|
@item -O @var{bfdname}
|
1145 |
|
|
@itemx --output-target=@var{bfdname}
|
1146 |
|
|
Write the output file using the object format @var{bfdname}.
|
1147 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
1148 |
|
|
|
1149 |
|
|
@item -F @var{bfdname}
|
1150 |
|
|
@itemx --target=@var{bfdname}
|
1151 |
|
|
Use @var{bfdname} as the object format for both the input and the output
|
1152 |
|
|
file; i.e., simply transfer data from source to destination with no
|
1153 |
|
|
translation. @xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
1154 |
|
|
|
1155 |
|
|
@item -B @var{bfdarch}
|
1156 |
|
|
@itemx --binary-architecture=@var{bfdarch}
|
1157 |
|
|
Useful when transforming a architecture-less input file into an object file.
|
1158 |
|
|
In this case the output architecture can be set to @var{bfdarch}. This
|
1159 |
|
|
option will be ignored if the input file has a known @var{bfdarch}. You
|
1160 |
|
|
can access this binary data inside a program by referencing the special
|
1161 |
|
|
symbols that are created by the conversion process. These symbols are
|
1162 |
|
|
called _binary_@var{objfile}_start, _binary_@var{objfile}_end and
|
1163 |
|
|
_binary_@var{objfile}_size. e.g. you can transform a picture file into
|
1164 |
|
|
an object file and then access it in your code using these symbols.
|
1165 |
|
|
|
1166 |
|
|
@item -j @var{sectionname}
|
1167 |
|
|
@itemx --only-section=@var{sectionname}
|
1168 |
|
|
Copy only the named section from the input file to the output file.
|
1169 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once. Note that using this option
|
1170 |
|
|
inappropriately may make the output file unusable.
|
1171 |
|
|
|
1172 |
|
|
@item -R @var{sectionname}
|
1173 |
|
|
@itemx --remove-section=@var{sectionname}
|
1174 |
|
|
Remove any section named @var{sectionname} from the output file. This
|
1175 |
|
|
option may be given more than once. Note that using this option
|
1176 |
|
|
inappropriately may make the output file unusable.
|
1177 |
|
|
|
1178 |
|
|
@item -S
|
1179 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-all
|
1180 |
|
|
Do not copy relocation and symbol information from the source file.
|
1181 |
|
|
|
1182 |
|
|
@item -g
|
1183 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-debug
|
1184 |
|
|
Do not copy debugging symbols or sections from the source file.
|
1185 |
|
|
|
1186 |
|
|
@item --strip-unneeded
|
1187 |
|
|
Strip all symbols that are not needed for relocation processing.
|
1188 |
|
|
|
1189 |
|
|
@item -K @var{symbolname}
|
1190 |
|
|
@itemx --keep-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1191 |
|
|
When stripping symbols, keep symbol @var{symbolname} even if it would
|
1192 |
|
|
normally be stripped. This option may be given more than once.
|
1193 |
|
|
|
1194 |
|
|
@item -N @var{symbolname}
|
1195 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1196 |
|
|
Do not copy symbol @var{symbolname} from the source file. This option
|
1197 |
|
|
may be given more than once.
|
1198 |
|
|
|
1199 |
|
|
@item --strip-unneeded-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1200 |
|
|
Do not copy symbol @var{symbolname} from the source file unless it is needed
|
1201 |
|
|
by a relocation. This option may be given more than once.
|
1202 |
|
|
|
1203 |
|
|
@item -G @var{symbolname}
|
1204 |
|
|
@itemx --keep-global-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1205 |
|
|
Keep only symbol @var{symbolname} global. Make all other symbols local
|
1206 |
|
|
to the file, so that they are not visible externally. This option may
|
1207 |
|
|
be given more than once.
|
1208 |
|
|
|
1209 |
|
|
@item --localize-hidden
|
1210 |
|
|
In an ELF object, mark all symbols that have hidden or internal visibility
|
1211 |
|
|
as local. This option applies on top of symbol-specific localization options
|
1212 |
|
|
such as @option{-L}.
|
1213 |
|
|
|
1214 |
|
|
@item -L @var{symbolname}
|
1215 |
|
|
@itemx --localize-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1216 |
|
|
Make symbol @var{symbolname} local to the file, so that it is not
|
1217 |
|
|
visible externally. This option may be given more than once.
|
1218 |
|
|
|
1219 |
|
|
@item -W @var{symbolname}
|
1220 |
|
|
@itemx --weaken-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1221 |
|
|
Make symbol @var{symbolname} weak. This option may be given more than once.
|
1222 |
|
|
|
1223 |
|
|
@item --globalize-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
1224 |
|
|
Give symbol @var{symbolname} global scoping so that it is visible
|
1225 |
|
|
outside of the file in which it is defined. This option may be given
|
1226 |
|
|
more than once.
|
1227 |
|
|
|
1228 |
|
|
@item -w
|
1229 |
|
|
@itemx --wildcard
|
1230 |
|
|
Permit regular expressions in @var{symbolname}s used in other command
|
1231 |
|
|
line options. The question mark (?), asterisk (*), backslash (\) and
|
1232 |
|
|
square brackets ([]) operators can be used anywhere in the symbol
|
1233 |
|
|
name. If the first character of the symbol name is the exclamation
|
1234 |
|
|
point (!) then the sense of the switch is reversed for that symbol.
|
1235 |
|
|
For example:
|
1236 |
|
|
|
1237 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1238 |
|
|
-w -W !foo -W fo*
|
1239 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1240 |
|
|
|
1241 |
|
|
would cause objcopy to weaken all symbols that start with ``fo''
|
1242 |
|
|
except for the symbol ``foo''.
|
1243 |
|
|
|
1244 |
|
|
@item -x
|
1245 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-all
|
1246 |
|
|
Do not copy non-global symbols from the source file.
|
1247 |
|
|
@c FIXME any reason to prefer "non-global" to "local" here?
|
1248 |
|
|
|
1249 |
|
|
@item -X
|
1250 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-locals
|
1251 |
|
|
Do not copy compiler-generated local symbols.
|
1252 |
|
|
(These usually start with @samp{L} or @samp{.}.)
|
1253 |
|
|
|
1254 |
|
|
@item -b @var{byte}
|
1255 |
|
|
@itemx --byte=@var{byte}
|
1256 |
|
|
If interleaving has been enabled via the @option{--interleave} option
|
1257 |
|
|
then start the range of bytes to keep at the @var{byte}th byte.
|
1258 |
|
|
@var{byte} can be in the range from 0 to @var{breadth}-1, where
|
1259 |
|
|
@var{breadth} is the value given by the @option{--interleave} option.
|
1260 |
|
|
|
1261 |
|
|
@item -i [@var{breadth}]
|
1262 |
|
|
@itemx --interleave[=@var{breadth}]
|
1263 |
|
|
Only copy a range out of every @var{breadth} bytes. (Header data is
|
1264 |
|
|
not affected). Select which byte in the range begins the copy with
|
1265 |
|
|
the @option{--byte} option. Select the width of the range with the
|
1266 |
|
|
@option{--interleave-width} option.
|
1267 |
|
|
|
1268 |
|
|
This option is useful for creating files to program @sc{rom}. It is
|
1269 |
|
|
typically used with an @code{srec} output target. Note that
|
1270 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} will complain if you do not specify the
|
1271 |
|
|
@option{--byte} option as well.
|
1272 |
|
|
|
1273 |
|
|
The default interleave breadth is 4, so with @option{--byte} set to 0,
|
1274 |
|
|
@command{objcopy} would copy the first byte out of every four bytes
|
1275 |
|
|
from the input to the output.
|
1276 |
|
|
|
1277 |
|
|
@item --interleave-width=@var{width}
|
1278 |
|
|
When used with the @option{--interleave} option, copy @var{width}
|
1279 |
|
|
bytes at a time. The start of the range of bytes to be copied is set
|
1280 |
|
|
by the @option{--byte} option, and the extent of the range is set with
|
1281 |
|
|
the @option{--interleave} option.
|
1282 |
|
|
|
1283 |
|
|
The default value for this option is 1. The value of @var{width} plus
|
1284 |
|
|
the @var{byte} value set by the @option{--byte} option must not exceed
|
1285 |
|
|
the interleave breadth set by the @option{--interleave} option.
|
1286 |
|
|
|
1287 |
|
|
This option can be used to create images for two 16-bit flashes interleaved
|
1288 |
|
|
in a 32-bit bus by passing @option{-b 0 -i 4 --interleave-width=2}
|
1289 |
|
|
and @option{-b 2 -i 4 --interleave-width=2} to two @command{objcopy}
|
1290 |
|
|
commands. If the input was '12345678' then the outputs would be
|
1291 |
|
|
'1256' and '3478' respectively.
|
1292 |
|
|
|
1293 |
|
|
@item -p
|
1294 |
|
|
@itemx --preserve-dates
|
1295 |
|
|
Set the access and modification dates of the output file to be the same
|
1296 |
|
|
as those of the input file.
|
1297 |
|
|
|
1298 |
|
|
@item --debugging
|
1299 |
|
|
Convert debugging information, if possible. This is not the default
|
1300 |
|
|
because only certain debugging formats are supported, and the
|
1301 |
|
|
conversion process can be time consuming.
|
1302 |
|
|
|
1303 |
|
|
@item --gap-fill @var{val}
|
1304 |
|
|
Fill gaps between sections with @var{val}. This operation applies to
|
1305 |
|
|
the @emph{load address} (LMA) of the sections. It is done by increasing
|
1306 |
|
|
the size of the section with the lower address, and filling in the extra
|
1307 |
|
|
space created with @var{val}.
|
1308 |
|
|
|
1309 |
|
|
@item --pad-to @var{address}
|
1310 |
|
|
Pad the output file up to the load address @var{address}. This is
|
1311 |
|
|
done by increasing the size of the last section. The extra space is
|
1312 |
|
|
filled in with the value specified by @option{--gap-fill} (default zero).
|
1313 |
|
|
|
1314 |
|
|
@item --set-start @var{val}
|
1315 |
|
|
Set the start address of the new file to @var{val}. Not all object file
|
1316 |
|
|
formats support setting the start address.
|
1317 |
|
|
|
1318 |
|
|
@item --change-start @var{incr}
|
1319 |
|
|
@itemx --adjust-start @var{incr}
|
1320 |
|
|
@cindex changing start address
|
1321 |
|
|
Change the start address by adding @var{incr}. Not all object file
|
1322 |
|
|
formats support setting the start address.
|
1323 |
|
|
|
1324 |
|
|
@item --change-addresses @var{incr}
|
1325 |
|
|
@itemx --adjust-vma @var{incr}
|
1326 |
|
|
@cindex changing object addresses
|
1327 |
|
|
Change the VMA and LMA addresses of all sections, as well as the start
|
1328 |
|
|
address, by adding @var{incr}. Some object file formats do not permit
|
1329 |
|
|
section addresses to be changed arbitrarily. Note that this does not
|
1330 |
|
|
relocate the sections; if the program expects sections to be loaded at a
|
1331 |
|
|
certain address, and this option is used to change the sections such
|
1332 |
|
|
that they are loaded at a different address, the program may fail.
|
1333 |
|
|
|
1334 |
|
|
@item --change-section-address @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}
|
1335 |
|
|
@itemx --adjust-section-vma @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}
|
1336 |
|
|
@cindex changing section address
|
1337 |
|
|
Set or change both the VMA address and the LMA address of the named
|
1338 |
|
|
@var{section}. If @samp{=} is used, the section address is set to
|
1339 |
|
|
@var{val}. Otherwise, @var{val} is added to or subtracted from the
|
1340 |
|
|
section address. See the comments under @option{--change-addresses},
|
1341 |
|
|
above. If @var{section} does not exist in the input file, a warning will
|
1342 |
|
|
be issued, unless @option{--no-change-warnings} is used.
|
1343 |
|
|
|
1344 |
|
|
@item --change-section-lma @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}
|
1345 |
|
|
@cindex changing section LMA
|
1346 |
|
|
Set or change the LMA address of the named @var{section}. The LMA
|
1347 |
|
|
address is the address where the section will be loaded into memory at
|
1348 |
|
|
program load time. Normally this is the same as the VMA address, which
|
1349 |
|
|
is the address of the section at program run time, but on some systems,
|
1350 |
|
|
especially those where a program is held in ROM, the two can be
|
1351 |
|
|
different. If @samp{=} is used, the section address is set to
|
1352 |
|
|
@var{val}. Otherwise, @var{val} is added to or subtracted from the
|
1353 |
|
|
section address. See the comments under @option{--change-addresses},
|
1354 |
|
|
above. If @var{section} does not exist in the input file, a warning
|
1355 |
|
|
will be issued, unless @option{--no-change-warnings} is used.
|
1356 |
|
|
|
1357 |
|
|
@item --change-section-vma @var{section}@{=,+,-@}@var{val}
|
1358 |
|
|
@cindex changing section VMA
|
1359 |
|
|
Set or change the VMA address of the named @var{section}. The VMA
|
1360 |
|
|
address is the address where the section will be located once the
|
1361 |
|
|
program has started executing. Normally this is the same as the LMA
|
1362 |
|
|
address, which is the address where the section will be loaded into
|
1363 |
|
|
memory, but on some systems, especially those where a program is held in
|
1364 |
|
|
ROM, the two can be different. If @samp{=} is used, the section address
|
1365 |
|
|
is set to @var{val}. Otherwise, @var{val} is added to or subtracted
|
1366 |
|
|
from the section address. See the comments under
|
1367 |
|
|
@option{--change-addresses}, above. If @var{section} does not exist in
|
1368 |
|
|
the input file, a warning will be issued, unless
|
1369 |
|
|
@option{--no-change-warnings} is used.
|
1370 |
|
|
|
1371 |
|
|
@item --change-warnings
|
1372 |
|
|
@itemx --adjust-warnings
|
1373 |
|
|
If @option{--change-section-address} or @option{--change-section-lma} or
|
1374 |
|
|
@option{--change-section-vma} is used, and the named section does not
|
1375 |
|
|
exist, issue a warning. This is the default.
|
1376 |
|
|
|
1377 |
|
|
@item --no-change-warnings
|
1378 |
|
|
@itemx --no-adjust-warnings
|
1379 |
|
|
Do not issue a warning if @option{--change-section-address} or
|
1380 |
|
|
@option{--adjust-section-lma} or @option{--adjust-section-vma} is used, even
|
1381 |
|
|
if the named section does not exist.
|
1382 |
|
|
|
1383 |
|
|
@item --set-section-flags @var{section}=@var{flags}
|
1384 |
|
|
Set the flags for the named section. The @var{flags} argument is a
|
1385 |
|
|
comma separated string of flag names. The recognized names are
|
1386 |
|
|
@samp{alloc}, @samp{contents}, @samp{load}, @samp{noload},
|
1387 |
|
|
@samp{readonly}, @samp{code}, @samp{data}, @samp{rom}, @samp{share}, and
|
1388 |
|
|
@samp{debug}. You can set the @samp{contents} flag for a section which
|
1389 |
|
|
does not have contents, but it is not meaningful to clear the
|
1390 |
|
|
@samp{contents} flag of a section which does have contents--just remove
|
1391 |
|
|
the section instead. Not all flags are meaningful for all object file
|
1392 |
|
|
formats.
|
1393 |
|
|
|
1394 |
|
|
@item --add-section @var{sectionname}=@var{filename}
|
1395 |
|
|
Add a new section named @var{sectionname} while copying the file. The
|
1396 |
|
|
contents of the new section are taken from the file @var{filename}. The
|
1397 |
|
|
size of the section will be the size of the file. This option only
|
1398 |
|
|
works on file formats which can support sections with arbitrary names.
|
1399 |
|
|
|
1400 |
|
|
@item --rename-section @var{oldname}=@var{newname}[,@var{flags}]
|
1401 |
|
|
Rename a section from @var{oldname} to @var{newname}, optionally
|
1402 |
|
|
changing the section's flags to @var{flags} in the process. This has
|
1403 |
|
|
the advantage over usng a linker script to perform the rename in that
|
1404 |
|
|
the output stays as an object file and does not become a linked
|
1405 |
|
|
executable.
|
1406 |
|
|
|
1407 |
|
|
This option is particularly helpful when the input format is binary,
|
1408 |
|
|
since this will always create a section called .data. If for example,
|
1409 |
|
|
you wanted instead to create a section called .rodata containing binary
|
1410 |
|
|
data you could use the following command line to achieve it:
|
1411 |
|
|
|
1412 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1413 |
|
|
objcopy -I binary -O <output_format> -B <architecture> \
|
1414 |
|
|
--rename-section .data=.rodata,alloc,load,readonly,data,contents \
|
1415 |
|
|
<input_binary_file> <output_object_file>
|
1416 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1417 |
|
|
|
1418 |
|
|
@item --long-section-names @{enable,disable,keep@}
|
1419 |
|
|
Controls the handling of long section names when processing @code{COFF}
|
1420 |
|
|
and @code{PE-COFF} object formats. The default behaviour, @samp{keep},
|
1421 |
|
|
is to preserve long section names if any are present in the input file.
|
1422 |
|
|
The @samp{enable} and @samp{disable} options forcibly enable or disable
|
1423 |
|
|
the use of long section names in the output object; when @samp{disable}
|
1424 |
|
|
is in effect, any long section names in the input object will be truncated.
|
1425 |
|
|
The @samp{enable} option will only emit long section names if any are
|
1426 |
|
|
present in the inputs; this is mostly the same as @samp{keep}, but it
|
1427 |
|
|
is left undefined whether the @samp{enable} option might force the
|
1428 |
|
|
creation of an empty string table in the output file.
|
1429 |
|
|
|
1430 |
|
|
@item --change-leading-char
|
1431 |
|
|
Some object file formats use special characters at the start of
|
1432 |
|
|
symbols. The most common such character is underscore, which compilers
|
1433 |
|
|
often add before every symbol. This option tells @command{objcopy} to
|
1434 |
|
|
change the leading character of every symbol when it converts between
|
1435 |
|
|
object file formats. If the object file formats use the same leading
|
1436 |
|
|
character, this option has no effect. Otherwise, it will add a
|
1437 |
|
|
character, or remove a character, or change a character, as
|
1438 |
|
|
appropriate.
|
1439 |
|
|
|
1440 |
|
|
@item --remove-leading-char
|
1441 |
|
|
If the first character of a global symbol is a special symbol leading
|
1442 |
|
|
character used by the object file format, remove the character. The
|
1443 |
|
|
most common symbol leading character is underscore. This option will
|
1444 |
|
|
remove a leading underscore from all global symbols. This can be useful
|
1445 |
|
|
if you want to link together objects of different file formats with
|
1446 |
|
|
different conventions for symbol names. This is different from
|
1447 |
|
|
@option{--change-leading-char} because it always changes the symbol name
|
1448 |
|
|
when appropriate, regardless of the object file format of the output
|
1449 |
|
|
file.
|
1450 |
|
|
|
1451 |
|
|
@item --reverse-bytes=@var{num}
|
1452 |
|
|
Reverse the bytes in a section with output contents. A section length must
|
1453 |
|
|
be evenly divisible by the value given in order for the swap to be able to
|
1454 |
|
|
take place. Reversing takes place before the interleaving is performed.
|
1455 |
|
|
|
1456 |
|
|
This option is used typically in generating ROM images for problematic
|
1457 |
|
|
target systems. For example, on some target boards, the 32-bit words
|
1458 |
|
|
fetched from 8-bit ROMs are re-assembled in little-endian byte order
|
1459 |
|
|
regardless of the CPU byte order. Depending on the programming model, the
|
1460 |
|
|
endianness of the ROM may need to be modified.
|
1461 |
|
|
|
1462 |
|
|
Consider a simple file with a section containing the following eight
|
1463 |
|
|
bytes: @code{12345678}.
|
1464 |
|
|
|
1465 |
|
|
Using @samp{--reverse-bytes=2} for the above example, the bytes in the
|
1466 |
|
|
output file would be ordered @code{21436587}.
|
1467 |
|
|
|
1468 |
|
|
Using @samp{--reverse-bytes=4} for the above example, the bytes in the
|
1469 |
|
|
output file would be ordered @code{43218765}.
|
1470 |
|
|
|
1471 |
|
|
By using @samp{--reverse-bytes=2} for the above example, followed by
|
1472 |
|
|
@samp{--reverse-bytes=4} on the output file, the bytes in the second
|
1473 |
|
|
output file would be ordered @code{34127856}.
|
1474 |
|
|
|
1475 |
|
|
@item --srec-len=@var{ival}
|
1476 |
|
|
Meaningful only for srec output. Set the maximum length of the Srecords
|
1477 |
|
|
being produced to @var{ival}. This length covers both address, data and
|
1478 |
|
|
crc fields.
|
1479 |
|
|
|
1480 |
|
|
@item --srec-forceS3
|
1481 |
|
|
Meaningful only for srec output. Avoid generation of S1/S2 records,
|
1482 |
|
|
creating S3-only record format.
|
1483 |
|
|
|
1484 |
|
|
@item --redefine-sym @var{old}=@var{new}
|
1485 |
|
|
Change the name of a symbol @var{old}, to @var{new}. This can be useful
|
1486 |
|
|
when one is trying link two things together for which you have no
|
1487 |
|
|
source, and there are name collisions.
|
1488 |
|
|
|
1489 |
|
|
@item --redefine-syms=@var{filename}
|
1490 |
|
|
Apply @option{--redefine-sym} to each symbol pair "@var{old} @var{new}"
|
1491 |
|
|
listed in the file @var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file,
|
1492 |
|
|
with one symbol pair per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash
|
1493 |
|
|
character. This option may be given more than once.
|
1494 |
|
|
|
1495 |
|
|
@item --weaken
|
1496 |
|
|
Change all global symbols in the file to be weak. This can be useful
|
1497 |
|
|
when building an object which will be linked against other objects using
|
1498 |
|
|
the @option{-R} option to the linker. This option is only effective when
|
1499 |
|
|
using an object file format which supports weak symbols.
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
|
|
@item --keep-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1502 |
|
|
Apply @option{--keep-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the file
|
1503 |
|
|
@var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one symbol
|
1504 |
|
|
name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash character.
|
1505 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once.
|
1506 |
|
|
|
1507 |
|
|
@item --strip-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1508 |
|
|
Apply @option{--strip-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the file
|
1509 |
|
|
@var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one symbol
|
1510 |
|
|
name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash character.
|
1511 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once.
|
1512 |
|
|
|
1513 |
|
|
@item --strip-unneeded-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1514 |
|
|
Apply @option{--strip-unneeded-symbol} option to each symbol listed in
|
1515 |
|
|
the file @var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
|
1516 |
|
|
symbol name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash
|
1517 |
|
|
character. This option may be given more than once.
|
1518 |
|
|
|
1519 |
|
|
@item --keep-global-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1520 |
|
|
Apply @option{--keep-global-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the
|
1521 |
|
|
file @var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
|
1522 |
|
|
symbol name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash
|
1523 |
|
|
character. This option may be given more than once.
|
1524 |
|
|
|
1525 |
|
|
@item --localize-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1526 |
|
|
Apply @option{--localize-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the file
|
1527 |
|
|
@var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one symbol
|
1528 |
|
|
name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash character.
|
1529 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once.
|
1530 |
|
|
|
1531 |
|
|
@item --globalize-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1532 |
|
|
Apply @option{--globalize-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the file
|
1533 |
|
|
@var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one symbol
|
1534 |
|
|
name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash character.
|
1535 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once.
|
1536 |
|
|
|
1537 |
|
|
@item --weaken-symbols=@var{filename}
|
1538 |
|
|
Apply @option{--weaken-symbol} option to each symbol listed in the file
|
1539 |
|
|
@var{filename}. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one symbol
|
1540 |
|
|
name per line. Line comments may be introduced by the hash character.
|
1541 |
|
|
This option may be given more than once.
|
1542 |
|
|
|
1543 |
|
|
@item --alt-machine-code=@var{index}
|
1544 |
|
|
If the output architecture has alternate machine codes, use the
|
1545 |
|
|
@var{index}th code instead of the default one. This is useful in case
|
1546 |
|
|
a machine is assigned an official code and the tool-chain adopts the
|
1547 |
|
|
new code, but other applications still depend on the original code
|
1548 |
|
|
being used. For ELF based architectures if the @var{index}
|
1549 |
|
|
alternative does not exist then the value is treated as an absolute
|
1550 |
|
|
number to be stored in the e_machine field of the ELF header.
|
1551 |
|
|
|
1552 |
|
|
@item --writable-text
|
1553 |
|
|
Mark the output text as writable. This option isn't meaningful for all
|
1554 |
|
|
object file formats.
|
1555 |
|
|
|
1556 |
|
|
@item --readonly-text
|
1557 |
|
|
Make the output text write protected. This option isn't meaningful for all
|
1558 |
|
|
object file formats.
|
1559 |
|
|
|
1560 |
|
|
@item --pure
|
1561 |
|
|
Mark the output file as demand paged. This option isn't meaningful for all
|
1562 |
|
|
object file formats.
|
1563 |
|
|
|
1564 |
|
|
@item --impure
|
1565 |
|
|
Mark the output file as impure. This option isn't meaningful for all
|
1566 |
|
|
object file formats.
|
1567 |
|
|
|
1568 |
|
|
@item --prefix-symbols=@var{string}
|
1569 |
|
|
Prefix all symbols in the output file with @var{string}.
|
1570 |
|
|
|
1571 |
|
|
@item --prefix-sections=@var{string}
|
1572 |
|
|
Prefix all section names in the output file with @var{string}.
|
1573 |
|
|
|
1574 |
|
|
@item --prefix-alloc-sections=@var{string}
|
1575 |
|
|
Prefix all the names of all allocated sections in the output file with
|
1576 |
|
|
@var{string}.
|
1577 |
|
|
|
1578 |
|
|
@item --add-gnu-debuglink=@var{path-to-file}
|
1579 |
|
|
Creates a .gnu_debuglink section which contains a reference to @var{path-to-file}
|
1580 |
|
|
and adds it to the output file.
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
@item --keep-file-symbols
|
1583 |
|
|
When stripping a file, perhaps with @option{--strip-debug} or
|
1584 |
|
|
@option{--strip-unneeded}, retain any symbols specifying source file names,
|
1585 |
|
|
which would otherwise get stripped.
|
1586 |
|
|
|
1587 |
|
|
@item --only-keep-debug
|
1588 |
|
|
Strip a file, removing contents of any sections that would not be
|
1589 |
|
|
stripped by @option{--strip-debug} and leaving the debugging sections
|
1590 |
|
|
intact. In ELF files, this preserves all note sections in the output.
|
1591 |
|
|
|
1592 |
|
|
The intention is that this option will be used in conjunction with
|
1593 |
|
|
@option{--add-gnu-debuglink} to create a two part executable. One a
|
1594 |
|
|
stripped binary which will occupy less space in RAM and in a
|
1595 |
|
|
distribution and the second a debugging information file which is only
|
1596 |
|
|
needed if debugging abilities are required. The suggested procedure
|
1597 |
|
|
to create these files is as follows:
|
1598 |
|
|
|
1599 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
1600 |
|
|
@item Link the executable as normal. Assuming that is is called
|
1601 |
|
|
@code{foo} then...
|
1602 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --only-keep-debug foo foo.dbg} to
|
1603 |
|
|
create a file containing the debugging info.
|
1604 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --strip-debug foo} to create a
|
1605 |
|
|
stripped executable.
|
1606 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.dbg foo}
|
1607 |
|
|
to add a link to the debugging info into the stripped executable.
|
1608 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
1609 |
|
|
|
1610 |
|
|
Note---the choice of @code{.dbg} as an extension for the debug info
|
1611 |
|
|
file is arbitrary. Also the @code{--only-keep-debug} step is
|
1612 |
|
|
optional. You could instead do this:
|
1613 |
|
|
|
1614 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
1615 |
|
|
@item Link the executable as normal.
|
1616 |
|
|
@item Copy @code{foo} to @code{foo.full}
|
1617 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --strip-debug foo}
|
1618 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.full foo}
|
1619 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
1620 |
|
|
|
1621 |
|
|
i.e., the file pointed to by the @option{--add-gnu-debuglink} can be the
|
1622 |
|
|
full executable. It does not have to be a file created by the
|
1623 |
|
|
@option{--only-keep-debug} switch.
|
1624 |
|
|
|
1625 |
|
|
Note---this switch is only intended for use on fully linked files. It
|
1626 |
|
|
does not make sense to use it on object files where the debugging
|
1627 |
|
|
information may be incomplete. Besides the gnu_debuglink feature
|
1628 |
|
|
currently only supports the presence of one filename containing
|
1629 |
|
|
debugging information, not multiple filenames on a one-per-object-file
|
1630 |
|
|
basis.
|
1631 |
|
|
|
1632 |
|
|
@item --file-alignment @var{num}
|
1633 |
|
|
Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
|
1634 |
|
|
file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
|
1635 |
|
|
512.
|
1636 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1637 |
|
|
|
1638 |
|
|
@item --heap @var{reserve}
|
1639 |
|
|
@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
1640 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
|
1641 |
|
|
to be used as heap for this program.
|
1642 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1643 |
|
|
|
1644 |
|
|
@item --image-base @var{value}
|
1645 |
|
|
Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
|
1646 |
|
|
the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
1647 |
|
|
is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
|
1648 |
|
|
your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
|
1649 |
|
|
other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
|
1650 |
|
|
for dlls.
|
1651 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1652 |
|
|
|
1653 |
|
|
@item --section-alignment @var{num}
|
1654 |
|
|
Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
|
1655 |
|
|
addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
|
1656 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1657 |
|
|
|
1658 |
|
|
@item --stack @var{reserve}
|
1659 |
|
|
@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
1660 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
|
1661 |
|
|
to be used as stack for this program.
|
1662 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1663 |
|
|
|
1664 |
|
|
@item --subsystem @var{which}
|
1665 |
|
|
@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
|
1666 |
|
|
@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
|
1667 |
|
|
Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
1668 |
|
|
legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
|
1669 |
|
|
@code{console}, @code{posix}, @code{efi-app}, @code{efi-bsd},
|
1670 |
|
|
@code{efi-rtd}, @code{sal-rtd}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
|
1671 |
|
|
the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
|
1672 |
|
|
@var{which}.
|
1673 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targets.]
|
1674 |
|
|
|
1675 |
|
|
@item --extract-symbol
|
1676 |
|
|
Keep the file's section flags and symbols but remove all section data.
|
1677 |
|
|
Specifically, the option:
|
1678 |
|
|
|
1679 |
|
|
@itemize
|
1680 |
|
|
@item removes the contents of all sections;
|
1681 |
|
|
@item sets the size of every section to zero; and
|
1682 |
|
|
@item sets the file's start address to zero.
|
1683 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
1684 |
|
|
|
1685 |
|
|
This option is used to build a @file{.sym} file for a VxWorks kernel.
|
1686 |
|
|
It can also be a useful way of reducing the size of a @option{--just-symbols}
|
1687 |
|
|
linker input file.
|
1688 |
|
|
|
1689 |
|
|
@item --compress-debug-sections
|
1690 |
|
|
Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib.
|
1691 |
|
|
|
1692 |
|
|
@item --decompress-debug-sections
|
1693 |
|
|
Decompress DWARF debug sections using zlib.
|
1694 |
|
|
|
1695 |
|
|
@item -V
|
1696 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
1697 |
|
|
Show the version number of @command{objcopy}.
|
1698 |
|
|
|
1699 |
|
|
@item -v
|
1700 |
|
|
@itemx --verbose
|
1701 |
|
|
Verbose output: list all object files modified. In the case of
|
1702 |
|
|
archives, @samp{objcopy -V} lists all members of the archive.
|
1703 |
|
|
|
1704 |
|
|
@item --help
|
1705 |
|
|
Show a summary of the options to @command{objcopy}.
|
1706 |
|
|
|
1707 |
|
|
@item --info
|
1708 |
|
|
Display a list showing all architectures and object formats available.
|
1709 |
|
|
@end table
|
1710 |
|
|
|
1711 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1712 |
|
|
|
1713 |
|
|
@ignore
|
1714 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO objcopy
|
1715 |
|
|
ld(1), objdump(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
1716 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1717 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
1718 |
|
|
|
1719 |
|
|
@node objdump
|
1720 |
|
|
@chapter objdump
|
1721 |
|
|
|
1722 |
|
|
@cindex object file information
|
1723 |
|
|
@kindex objdump
|
1724 |
|
|
|
1725 |
|
|
@c man title objdump display information from object files.
|
1726 |
|
|
|
1727 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1728 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS objdump
|
1729 |
|
|
objdump [@option{-a}|@option{--archive-headers}]
|
1730 |
|
|
[@option{-b} @var{bfdname}|@option{--target=@var{bfdname}}]
|
1731 |
|
|
[@option{-C}|@option{--demangle}[=@var{style}] ]
|
1732 |
|
|
[@option{-d}|@option{--disassemble}]
|
1733 |
|
|
[@option{-D}|@option{--disassemble-all}]
|
1734 |
|
|
[@option{-z}|@option{--disassemble-zeroes}]
|
1735 |
|
|
[@option{-EB}|@option{-EL}|@option{--endian=}@{big | little @}]
|
1736 |
|
|
[@option{-f}|@option{--file-headers}]
|
1737 |
|
|
[@option{-F}|@option{--file-offsets}]
|
1738 |
|
|
[@option{--file-start-context}]
|
1739 |
|
|
[@option{-g}|@option{--debugging}]
|
1740 |
|
|
[@option{-e}|@option{--debugging-tags}]
|
1741 |
|
|
[@option{-h}|@option{--section-headers}|@option{--headers}]
|
1742 |
|
|
[@option{-i}|@option{--info}]
|
1743 |
|
|
[@option{-j} @var{section}|@option{--section=}@var{section}]
|
1744 |
|
|
[@option{-l}|@option{--line-numbers}]
|
1745 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{--source}]
|
1746 |
|
|
[@option{-m} @var{machine}|@option{--architecture=}@var{machine}]
|
1747 |
|
|
[@option{-M} @var{options}|@option{--disassembler-options=}@var{options}]
|
1748 |
|
|
[@option{-p}|@option{--private-headers}]
|
1749 |
|
|
[@option{-P} @var{options}|@option{--private=}@var{options}]
|
1750 |
|
|
[@option{-r}|@option{--reloc}]
|
1751 |
|
|
[@option{-R}|@option{--dynamic-reloc}]
|
1752 |
|
|
[@option{-s}|@option{--full-contents}]
|
1753 |
|
|
[@option{-W[lLiaprmfFsoRt]}|
|
1754 |
|
|
@option{--dwarf}[=rawline,=decodedline,=info,=abbrev,=pubnames,=aranges,=macro,=frames,=frames-interp,=str,=loc,=Ranges,=pubtypes,=trace_info,=trace_abbrev,=trace_aranges,=gdb_index]]
|
1755 |
|
|
[@option{-G}|@option{--stabs}]
|
1756 |
|
|
[@option{-t}|@option{--syms}]
|
1757 |
|
|
[@option{-T}|@option{--dynamic-syms}]
|
1758 |
|
|
[@option{-x}|@option{--all-headers}]
|
1759 |
|
|
[@option{-w}|@option{--wide}]
|
1760 |
|
|
[@option{--start-address=}@var{address}]
|
1761 |
|
|
[@option{--stop-address=}@var{address}]
|
1762 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix-addresses}]
|
1763 |
|
|
[@option{--[no-]show-raw-insn}]
|
1764 |
|
|
[@option{--adjust-vma=}@var{offset}]
|
1765 |
|
|
[@option{--special-syms}]
|
1766 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix=}@var{prefix}]
|
1767 |
|
|
[@option{--prefix-strip=}@var{level}]
|
1768 |
|
|
[@option{--insn-width=}@var{width}]
|
1769 |
|
|
[@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
1770 |
|
|
[@option{-H}|@option{--help}]
|
1771 |
|
|
@var{objfile}@dots{}
|
1772 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1773 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1774 |
|
|
|
1775 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION objdump
|
1776 |
|
|
|
1777 |
|
|
@command{objdump} displays information about one or more object files.
|
1778 |
|
|
The options control what particular information to display. This
|
1779 |
|
|
information is mostly useful to programmers who are working on the
|
1780 |
|
|
compilation tools, as opposed to programmers who just want their
|
1781 |
|
|
program to compile and work.
|
1782 |
|
|
|
1783 |
|
|
@var{objfile}@dots{} are the object files to be examined. When you
|
1784 |
|
|
specify archives, @command{objdump} shows information on each of the member
|
1785 |
|
|
object files.
|
1786 |
|
|
|
1787 |
|
|
@c man end
|
1788 |
|
|
|
1789 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS objdump
|
1790 |
|
|
|
1791 |
|
|
The long and short forms of options, shown here as alternatives, are
|
1792 |
|
|
equivalent. At least one option from the list
|
1793 |
|
|
@option{-a,-d,-D,-e,-f,-g,-G,-h,-H,-p,-P,-r,-R,-s,-S,-t,-T,-V,-x} must be given.
|
1794 |
|
|
|
1795 |
|
|
@table @env
|
1796 |
|
|
@item -a
|
1797 |
|
|
@itemx --archive-header
|
1798 |
|
|
@cindex archive headers
|
1799 |
|
|
If any of the @var{objfile} files are archives, display the archive
|
1800 |
|
|
header information (in a format similar to @samp{ls -l}). Besides the
|
1801 |
|
|
information you could list with @samp{ar tv}, @samp{objdump -a} shows
|
1802 |
|
|
the object file format of each archive member.
|
1803 |
|
|
|
1804 |
|
|
@item --adjust-vma=@var{offset}
|
1805 |
|
|
@cindex section addresses in objdump
|
1806 |
|
|
@cindex VMA in objdump
|
1807 |
|
|
When dumping information, first add @var{offset} to all the section
|
1808 |
|
|
addresses. This is useful if the section addresses do not correspond to
|
1809 |
|
|
the symbol table, which can happen when putting sections at particular
|
1810 |
|
|
addresses when using a format which can not represent section addresses,
|
1811 |
|
|
such as a.out.
|
1812 |
|
|
|
1813 |
|
|
@item -b @var{bfdname}
|
1814 |
|
|
@itemx --target=@var{bfdname}
|
1815 |
|
|
@cindex object code format
|
1816 |
|
|
Specify that the object-code format for the object files is
|
1817 |
|
|
@var{bfdname}. This option may not be necessary; @var{objdump} can
|
1818 |
|
|
automatically recognize many formats.
|
1819 |
|
|
|
1820 |
|
|
For example,
|
1821 |
|
|
@example
|
1822 |
|
|
objdump -b oasys -m vax -h fu.o
|
1823 |
|
|
@end example
|
1824 |
|
|
@noindent
|
1825 |
|
|
displays summary information from the section headers (@option{-h}) of
|
1826 |
|
|
@file{fu.o}, which is explicitly identified (@option{-m}) as a VAX object
|
1827 |
|
|
file in the format produced by Oasys compilers. You can list the
|
1828 |
|
|
formats available with the @option{-i} option.
|
1829 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
1830 |
|
|
|
1831 |
|
|
@item -C
|
1832 |
|
|
@itemx --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
1833 |
|
|
@cindex demangling in objdump
|
1834 |
|
|
Decode (@dfn{demangle}) low-level symbol names into user-level names.
|
1835 |
|
|
Besides removing any initial underscore prepended by the system, this
|
1836 |
|
|
makes C++ function names readable. Different compilers have different
|
1837 |
|
|
mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used to
|
1838 |
|
|
choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. @xref{c++filt},
|
1839 |
|
|
for more information on demangling.
|
1840 |
|
|
|
1841 |
|
|
@item -g
|
1842 |
|
|
@itemx --debugging
|
1843 |
|
|
Display debugging information. This attempts to parse STABS and IEEE
|
1844 |
|
|
debugging format information stored in the file and print it out using
|
1845 |
|
|
a C like syntax. If neither of these formats are found this option
|
1846 |
|
|
falls back on the @option{-W} option to print any DWARF information in
|
1847 |
|
|
the file.
|
1848 |
|
|
|
1849 |
|
|
@item -e
|
1850 |
|
|
@itemx --debugging-tags
|
1851 |
|
|
Like @option{-g}, but the information is generated in a format compatible
|
1852 |
|
|
with ctags tool.
|
1853 |
|
|
|
1854 |
|
|
@item -d
|
1855 |
|
|
@itemx --disassemble
|
1856 |
|
|
@cindex disassembling object code
|
1857 |
|
|
@cindex machine instructions
|
1858 |
|
|
Display the assembler mnemonics for the machine instructions from
|
1859 |
|
|
@var{objfile}. This option only disassembles those sections which are
|
1860 |
|
|
expected to contain instructions.
|
1861 |
|
|
|
1862 |
|
|
@item -D
|
1863 |
|
|
@itemx --disassemble-all
|
1864 |
|
|
Like @option{-d}, but disassemble the contents of all sections, not just
|
1865 |
|
|
those expected to contain instructions.
|
1866 |
|
|
|
1867 |
|
|
If the target is an ARM architecture this switch also has the effect
|
1868 |
|
|
of forcing the disassembler to decode pieces of data found in code
|
1869 |
|
|
sections as if they were instructions.
|
1870 |
|
|
|
1871 |
|
|
@item --prefix-addresses
|
1872 |
|
|
When disassembling, print the complete address on each line. This is
|
1873 |
|
|
the older disassembly format.
|
1874 |
|
|
|
1875 |
|
|
@item -EB
|
1876 |
|
|
@itemx -EL
|
1877 |
|
|
@itemx --endian=@{big|little@}
|
1878 |
|
|
@cindex endianness
|
1879 |
|
|
@cindex disassembly endianness
|
1880 |
|
|
Specify the endianness of the object files. This only affects
|
1881 |
|
|
disassembly. This can be useful when disassembling a file format which
|
1882 |
|
|
does not describe endianness information, such as S-records.
|
1883 |
|
|
|
1884 |
|
|
@item -f
|
1885 |
|
|
@itemx --file-headers
|
1886 |
|
|
@cindex object file header
|
1887 |
|
|
Display summary information from the overall header of
|
1888 |
|
|
each of the @var{objfile} files.
|
1889 |
|
|
|
1890 |
|
|
@item -F
|
1891 |
|
|
@itemx --file-offsets
|
1892 |
|
|
@cindex object file offsets
|
1893 |
|
|
When disassembling sections, whenever a symbol is displayed, also
|
1894 |
|
|
display the file offset of the region of data that is about to be
|
1895 |
|
|
dumped. If zeroes are being skipped, then when disassembly resumes,
|
1896 |
|
|
tell the user how many zeroes were skipped and the file offset of the
|
1897 |
|
|
location from where the disassembly resumes. When dumping sections,
|
1898 |
|
|
display the file offset of the location from where the dump starts.
|
1899 |
|
|
|
1900 |
|
|
@item --file-start-context
|
1901 |
|
|
@cindex source code context
|
1902 |
|
|
Specify that when displaying interlisted source code/disassembly
|
1903 |
|
|
(assumes @option{-S}) from a file that has not yet been displayed, extend the
|
1904 |
|
|
context to the start of the file.
|
1905 |
|
|
|
1906 |
|
|
@item -h
|
1907 |
|
|
@itemx --section-headers
|
1908 |
|
|
@itemx --headers
|
1909 |
|
|
@cindex section headers
|
1910 |
|
|
Display summary information from the section headers of the
|
1911 |
|
|
object file.
|
1912 |
|
|
|
1913 |
|
|
File segments may be relocated to nonstandard addresses, for example by
|
1914 |
|
|
using the @option{-Ttext}, @option{-Tdata}, or @option{-Tbss} options to
|
1915 |
|
|
@command{ld}. However, some object file formats, such as a.out, do not
|
1916 |
|
|
store the starting address of the file segments. In those situations,
|
1917 |
|
|
although @command{ld} relocates the sections correctly, using @samp{objdump
|
1918 |
|
|
-h} to list the file section headers cannot show the correct addresses.
|
1919 |
|
|
Instead, it shows the usual addresses, which are implicit for the
|
1920 |
|
|
target.
|
1921 |
|
|
|
1922 |
|
|
@item -H
|
1923 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
1924 |
|
|
Print a summary of the options to @command{objdump} and exit.
|
1925 |
|
|
|
1926 |
|
|
@item -i
|
1927 |
|
|
@itemx --info
|
1928 |
|
|
@cindex architectures available
|
1929 |
|
|
@cindex object formats available
|
1930 |
|
|
Display a list showing all architectures and object formats available
|
1931 |
|
|
for specification with @option{-b} or @option{-m}.
|
1932 |
|
|
|
1933 |
|
|
@item -j @var{name}
|
1934 |
|
|
@itemx --section=@var{name}
|
1935 |
|
|
@cindex section information
|
1936 |
|
|
Display information only for section @var{name}.
|
1937 |
|
|
|
1938 |
|
|
@item -l
|
1939 |
|
|
@itemx --line-numbers
|
1940 |
|
|
@cindex source filenames for object files
|
1941 |
|
|
Label the display (using debugging information) with the filename and
|
1942 |
|
|
source line numbers corresponding to the object code or relocs shown.
|
1943 |
|
|
Only useful with @option{-d}, @option{-D}, or @option{-r}.
|
1944 |
|
|
|
1945 |
|
|
@item -m @var{machine}
|
1946 |
|
|
@itemx --architecture=@var{machine}
|
1947 |
|
|
@cindex architecture
|
1948 |
|
|
@cindex disassembly architecture
|
1949 |
|
|
Specify the architecture to use when disassembling object files. This
|
1950 |
|
|
can be useful when disassembling object files which do not describe
|
1951 |
|
|
architecture information, such as S-records. You can list the available
|
1952 |
|
|
architectures with the @option{-i} option.
|
1953 |
|
|
|
1954 |
|
|
If the target is an ARM architecture then this switch has an
|
1955 |
|
|
additional effect. It restricts the disassembly to only those
|
1956 |
|
|
instructions supported by the architecture specified by @var{machine}.
|
1957 |
|
|
If it is necessary to use this switch because the input file does not
|
1958 |
|
|
contain any architecture information, but it is also desired to
|
1959 |
|
|
disassemble all the instructions use @option{-marm}.
|
1960 |
|
|
|
1961 |
|
|
@item -M @var{options}
|
1962 |
|
|
@itemx --disassembler-options=@var{options}
|
1963 |
|
|
Pass target specific information to the disassembler. Only supported on
|
1964 |
|
|
some targets. If it is necessary to specify more than one
|
1965 |
|
|
disassembler option then multiple @option{-M} options can be used or
|
1966 |
|
|
can be placed together into a comma separated list.
|
1967 |
|
|
|
1968 |
|
|
If the target is an ARM architecture then this switch can be used to
|
1969 |
|
|
select which register name set is used during disassembler. Specifying
|
1970 |
|
|
@option{-M reg-names-std} (the default) will select the register names as
|
1971 |
|
|
used in ARM's instruction set documentation, but with register 13 called
|
1972 |
|
|
'sp', register 14 called 'lr' and register 15 called 'pc'. Specifying
|
1973 |
|
|
@option{-M reg-names-apcs} will select the name set used by the ARM
|
1974 |
|
|
Procedure Call Standard, whilst specifying @option{-M reg-names-raw} will
|
1975 |
|
|
just use @samp{r} followed by the register number.
|
1976 |
|
|
|
1977 |
|
|
There are also two variants on the APCS register naming scheme enabled
|
1978 |
|
|
by @option{-M reg-names-atpcs} and @option{-M reg-names-special-atpcs} which
|
1979 |
|
|
use the ARM/Thumb Procedure Call Standard naming conventions. (Either
|
1980 |
|
|
with the normal register names or the special register names).
|
1981 |
|
|
|
1982 |
|
|
This option can also be used for ARM architectures to force the
|
1983 |
|
|
disassembler to interpret all instructions as Thumb instructions by
|
1984 |
|
|
using the switch @option{--disassembler-options=force-thumb}. This can be
|
1985 |
|
|
useful when attempting to disassemble thumb code produced by other
|
1986 |
|
|
compilers.
|
1987 |
|
|
|
1988 |
|
|
For the x86, some of the options duplicate functions of the @option{-m}
|
1989 |
|
|
switch, but allow finer grained control. Multiple selections from the
|
1990 |
|
|
following may be specified as a comma separated string.
|
1991 |
|
|
@option{x86-64}, @option{i386} and @option{i8086} select disassembly for
|
1992 |
|
|
the given architecture. @option{intel} and @option{att} select between
|
1993 |
|
|
intel syntax mode and AT&T syntax mode.
|
1994 |
|
|
@option{intel-mnemonic} and @option{att-mnemonic} select between
|
1995 |
|
|
intel mnemonic mode and AT&T mnemonic mode. @option{intel-mnemonic}
|
1996 |
|
|
implies @option{intel} and @option{att-mnemonic} implies @option{att}.
|
1997 |
|
|
@option{addr64}, @option{addr32},
|
1998 |
|
|
@option{addr16}, @option{data32} and @option{data16} specify the default
|
1999 |
|
|
address size and operand size. These four options will be overridden if
|
2000 |
|
|
@option{x86-64}, @option{i386} or @option{i8086} appear later in the
|
2001 |
|
|
option string. Lastly, @option{suffix}, when in AT&T mode,
|
2002 |
|
|
instructs the disassembler to print a mnemonic suffix even when the
|
2003 |
|
|
suffix could be inferred by the operands.
|
2004 |
|
|
|
2005 |
|
|
For PowerPC, @option{booke} controls the disassembly of BookE
|
2006 |
|
|
instructions. @option{32} and @option{64} select PowerPC and
|
2007 |
|
|
PowerPC64 disassembly, respectively. @option{e300} selects
|
2008 |
|
|
disassembly for the e300 family. @option{440} selects disassembly for
|
2009 |
|
|
the PowerPC 440. @option{ppcps} selects disassembly for the paired
|
2010 |
|
|
single instructions of the PPC750CL.
|
2011 |
|
|
|
2012 |
|
|
For MIPS, this option controls the printing of instruction mnemonic
|
2013 |
|
|
names and register names in disassembled instructions. Multiple
|
2014 |
|
|
selections from the following may be specified as a comma separated
|
2015 |
|
|
string, and invalid options are ignored:
|
2016 |
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
@table @code
|
2018 |
|
|
@item no-aliases
|
2019 |
|
|
Print the 'raw' instruction mnemonic instead of some pseudo
|
2020 |
|
|
instruction mnemonic. I.e., print 'daddu' or 'or' instead of 'move',
|
2021 |
|
|
'sll' instead of 'nop', etc.
|
2022 |
|
|
|
2023 |
|
|
@item gpr-names=@var{ABI}
|
2024 |
|
|
Print GPR (general-purpose register) names as appropriate
|
2025 |
|
|
for the specified ABI. By default, GPR names are selected according to
|
2026 |
|
|
the ABI of the binary being disassembled.
|
2027 |
|
|
|
2028 |
|
|
@item fpr-names=@var{ABI}
|
2029 |
|
|
Print FPR (floating-point register) names as
|
2030 |
|
|
appropriate for the specified ABI. By default, FPR numbers are printed
|
2031 |
|
|
rather than names.
|
2032 |
|
|
|
2033 |
|
|
@item cp0-names=@var{ARCH}
|
2034 |
|
|
Print CP0 (system control coprocessor; coprocessor 0) register names
|
2035 |
|
|
as appropriate for the CPU or architecture specified by
|
2036 |
|
|
@var{ARCH}. By default, CP0 register names are selected according to
|
2037 |
|
|
the architecture and CPU of the binary being disassembled.
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
|
|
@item hwr-names=@var{ARCH}
|
2040 |
|
|
Print HWR (hardware register, used by the @code{rdhwr} instruction) names
|
2041 |
|
|
as appropriate for the CPU or architecture specified by
|
2042 |
|
|
@var{ARCH}. By default, HWR names are selected according to
|
2043 |
|
|
the architecture and CPU of the binary being disassembled.
|
2044 |
|
|
|
2045 |
|
|
@item reg-names=@var{ABI}
|
2046 |
|
|
Print GPR and FPR names as appropriate for the selected ABI.
|
2047 |
|
|
|
2048 |
|
|
@item reg-names=@var{ARCH}
|
2049 |
|
|
Print CPU-specific register names (CP0 register and HWR names)
|
2050 |
|
|
as appropriate for the selected CPU or architecture.
|
2051 |
|
|
@end table
|
2052 |
|
|
|
2053 |
|
|
For any of the options listed above, @var{ABI} or
|
2054 |
|
|
@var{ARCH} may be specified as @samp{numeric} to have numbers printed
|
2055 |
|
|
rather than names, for the selected types of registers.
|
2056 |
|
|
You can list the available values of @var{ABI} and @var{ARCH} using
|
2057 |
|
|
the @option{--help} option.
|
2058 |
|
|
|
2059 |
|
|
For VAX, you can specify function entry addresses with @option{-M
|
2060 |
|
|
entry:0xf00ba}. You can use this multiple times to properly
|
2061 |
|
|
disassemble VAX binary files that don't contain symbol tables (like
|
2062 |
|
|
ROM dumps). In these cases, the function entry mask would otherwise
|
2063 |
|
|
be decoded as VAX instructions, which would probably lead the rest
|
2064 |
|
|
of the function being wrongly disassembled.
|
2065 |
|
|
|
2066 |
|
|
@item -p
|
2067 |
|
|
@itemx --private-headers
|
2068 |
|
|
Print information that is specific to the object file format. The exact
|
2069 |
|
|
information printed depends upon the object file format. For some
|
2070 |
|
|
object file formats, no additional information is printed.
|
2071 |
|
|
|
2072 |
|
|
@item -P @var{options}
|
2073 |
|
|
@itemx --private=@var{options}
|
2074 |
|
|
Print information that is specific to the object file format. The
|
2075 |
|
|
argument @var{options} is a comma separated list that depends on the
|
2076 |
|
|
format (the lists of options is displayed with the help).
|
2077 |
|
|
|
2078 |
|
|
For XCOFF, the available options are: @option{header}, @option{aout},
|
2079 |
|
|
@option{sections}, @option{syms}, @option{relocs}, @option{lineno},
|
2080 |
|
|
@option{loader}, @option{except}, @option{typchk}, @option{traceback}
|
2081 |
|
|
and @option{toc}.
|
2082 |
|
|
|
2083 |
|
|
@item -r
|
2084 |
|
|
@itemx --reloc
|
2085 |
|
|
@cindex relocation entries, in object file
|
2086 |
|
|
Print the relocation entries of the file. If used with @option{-d} or
|
2087 |
|
|
@option{-D}, the relocations are printed interspersed with the
|
2088 |
|
|
disassembly.
|
2089 |
|
|
|
2090 |
|
|
@item -R
|
2091 |
|
|
@itemx --dynamic-reloc
|
2092 |
|
|
@cindex dynamic relocation entries, in object file
|
2093 |
|
|
Print the dynamic relocation entries of the file. This is only
|
2094 |
|
|
meaningful for dynamic objects, such as certain types of shared
|
2095 |
|
|
libraries. As for @option{-r}, if used with @option{-d} or
|
2096 |
|
|
@option{-D}, the relocations are printed interspersed with the
|
2097 |
|
|
disassembly.
|
2098 |
|
|
|
2099 |
|
|
@item -s
|
2100 |
|
|
@itemx --full-contents
|
2101 |
|
|
@cindex sections, full contents
|
2102 |
|
|
@cindex object file sections
|
2103 |
|
|
Display the full contents of any sections requested. By default all
|
2104 |
|
|
non-empty sections are displayed.
|
2105 |
|
|
|
2106 |
|
|
@item -S
|
2107 |
|
|
@itemx --source
|
2108 |
|
|
@cindex source disassembly
|
2109 |
|
|
@cindex disassembly, with source
|
2110 |
|
|
Display source code intermixed with disassembly, if possible. Implies
|
2111 |
|
|
@option{-d}.
|
2112 |
|
|
|
2113 |
|
|
@item --prefix=@var{prefix}
|
2114 |
|
|
@cindex Add prefix to absolute paths
|
2115 |
|
|
Specify @var{prefix} to add to the absolute paths when used with
|
2116 |
|
|
@option{-S}.
|
2117 |
|
|
|
2118 |
|
|
@item --prefix-strip=@var{level}
|
2119 |
|
|
@cindex Strip absolute paths
|
2120 |
|
|
Indicate how many initial directory names to strip off the hardwired
|
2121 |
|
|
absolute paths. It has no effect without @option{--prefix=}@var{prefix}.
|
2122 |
|
|
|
2123 |
|
|
@item --show-raw-insn
|
2124 |
|
|
When disassembling instructions, print the instruction in hex as well as
|
2125 |
|
|
in symbolic form. This is the default except when
|
2126 |
|
|
@option{--prefix-addresses} is used.
|
2127 |
|
|
|
2128 |
|
|
@item --no-show-raw-insn
|
2129 |
|
|
When disassembling instructions, do not print the instruction bytes.
|
2130 |
|
|
This is the default when @option{--prefix-addresses} is used.
|
2131 |
|
|
|
2132 |
|
|
@item --insn-width=@var{width}
|
2133 |
|
|
@cindex Instruction width
|
2134 |
|
|
Display @var{width} bytes on a single line when disassembling
|
2135 |
|
|
instructions.
|
2136 |
|
|
|
2137 |
|
|
@item -W[lLiaprmfFsoRt]
|
2138 |
|
|
@itemx --dwarf[=rawline,=decodedline,=info,=abbrev,=pubnames,=aranges,=macro,=frames,=frames-interp,=str,=loc,=Ranges,=pubtypes,=trace_info,=trace_abbrev,=trace_aranges,=gdb_index]
|
2139 |
|
|
@cindex DWARF
|
2140 |
|
|
@cindex debug symbols
|
2141 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the debug sections in the file, if any are
|
2142 |
|
|
present. If one of the optional letters or words follows the switch
|
2143 |
|
|
then only data found in those specific sections will be dumped.
|
2144 |
|
|
|
2145 |
|
|
Note that there is no single letter option to display the content of
|
2146 |
|
|
trace sections or .gdb_index.
|
2147 |
|
|
|
2148 |
|
|
Note: the output from the @option{=info} option can also be affected
|
2149 |
|
|
by the options @option{--dwarf-depth} and @option{--dwarf-start}.
|
2150 |
|
|
|
2151 |
|
|
@item --dwarf-depth=@var{n}
|
2152 |
|
|
Limit the dump of the @code{.debug_info} section to @var{n} children.
|
2153 |
|
|
This is only useful with @option{--dwarf=info}. The default is
|
2154 |
|
|
to print all DIEs; the special value 0 for @var{n} will also have this
|
2155 |
|
|
effect.
|
2156 |
|
|
|
2157 |
|
|
With a non-zero value for @var{n}, DIEs at or deeper than @var{n}
|
2158 |
|
|
levels will not be printed. The range for @var{n} is zero-based.
|
2159 |
|
|
|
2160 |
|
|
@item --dwarf-start=@var{n}
|
2161 |
|
|
Print only DIEs beginning with the DIE numbered @var{n}. This is only
|
2162 |
|
|
useful with @option{--dwarf=info}.
|
2163 |
|
|
|
2164 |
|
|
If specified, this option will suppress printing of any header
|
2165 |
|
|
information and all DIEs before the DIE numbered @var{n}. Only
|
2166 |
|
|
siblings and children of the specified DIE will be printed.
|
2167 |
|
|
|
2168 |
|
|
This can be used in conjunction with @option{--dwarf-depth}.
|
2169 |
|
|
|
2170 |
|
|
@item -G
|
2171 |
|
|
@itemx --stabs
|
2172 |
|
|
@cindex stab
|
2173 |
|
|
@cindex .stab
|
2174 |
|
|
@cindex debug symbols
|
2175 |
|
|
@cindex ELF object file format
|
2176 |
|
|
Display the full contents of any sections requested. Display the
|
2177 |
|
|
contents of the .stab and .stab.index and .stab.excl sections from an
|
2178 |
|
|
ELF file. This is only useful on systems (such as Solaris 2.0) in which
|
2179 |
|
|
@code{.stab} debugging symbol-table entries are carried in an ELF
|
2180 |
|
|
section. In most other file formats, debugging symbol-table entries are
|
2181 |
|
|
interleaved with linkage symbols, and are visible in the @option{--syms}
|
2182 |
|
|
output.
|
2183 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
2184 |
|
|
For more information on stabs symbols, see @ref{Top,Stabs,Stabs
|
2185 |
|
|
Overview,stabs.info, The ``stabs'' debug format}.
|
2186 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
2187 |
|
|
|
2188 |
|
|
@item --start-address=@var{address}
|
2189 |
|
|
@cindex start-address
|
2190 |
|
|
Start displaying data at the specified address. This affects the output
|
2191 |
|
|
of the @option{-d}, @option{-r} and @option{-s} options.
|
2192 |
|
|
|
2193 |
|
|
@item --stop-address=@var{address}
|
2194 |
|
|
@cindex stop-address
|
2195 |
|
|
Stop displaying data at the specified address. This affects the output
|
2196 |
|
|
of the @option{-d}, @option{-r} and @option{-s} options.
|
2197 |
|
|
|
2198 |
|
|
@item -t
|
2199 |
|
|
@itemx --syms
|
2200 |
|
|
@cindex symbol table entries, printing
|
2201 |
|
|
Print the symbol table entries of the file.
|
2202 |
|
|
This is similar to the information provided by the @samp{nm} program,
|
2203 |
|
|
although the display format is different. The format of the output
|
2204 |
|
|
depends upon the format of the file being dumped, but there are two main
|
2205 |
|
|
types. One looks like this:
|
2206 |
|
|
|
2207 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2208 |
|
|
[ 4](sec 3)(fl 0x00)(ty 0)(scl 3) (nx 1) 0x00000000 .bss
|
2209 |
|
|
[ 6](sec 1)(fl 0x00)(ty 0)(scl 2) (nx 0) 0x00000000 fred
|
2210 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2211 |
|
|
|
2212 |
|
|
where the number inside the square brackets is the number of the entry
|
2213 |
|
|
in the symbol table, the @var{sec} number is the section number, the
|
2214 |
|
|
@var{fl} value are the symbol's flag bits, the @var{ty} number is the
|
2215 |
|
|
symbol's type, the @var{scl} number is the symbol's storage class and
|
2216 |
|
|
the @var{nx} value is the number of auxilary entries associated with
|
2217 |
|
|
the symbol. The last two fields are the symbol's value and its name.
|
2218 |
|
|
|
2219 |
|
|
The other common output format, usually seen with ELF based files,
|
2220 |
|
|
looks like this:
|
2221 |
|
|
|
2222 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2223 |
|
|
00000000 l d .bss 00000000 .bss
|
2224 |
|
|
00000000 g .text 00000000 fred
|
2225 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2226 |
|
|
|
2227 |
|
|
Here the first number is the symbol's value (sometimes refered to as
|
2228 |
|
|
its address). The next field is actually a set of characters and
|
2229 |
|
|
spaces indicating the flag bits that are set on the symbol. These
|
2230 |
|
|
characters are described below. Next is the section with which the
|
2231 |
|
|
symbol is associated or @emph{*ABS*} if the section is absolute (ie
|
2232 |
|
|
not connected with any section), or @emph{*UND*} if the section is
|
2233 |
|
|
referenced in the file being dumped, but not defined there.
|
2234 |
|
|
|
2235 |
|
|
After the section name comes another field, a number, which for common
|
2236 |
|
|
symbols is the alignment and for other symbol is the size. Finally
|
2237 |
|
|
the symbol's name is displayed.
|
2238 |
|
|
|
2239 |
|
|
The flag characters are divided into 7 groups as follows:
|
2240 |
|
|
@table @code
|
2241 |
|
|
@item l
|
2242 |
|
|
@itemx g
|
2243 |
|
|
@itemx u
|
2244 |
|
|
@itemx !
|
2245 |
|
|
The symbol is a local (l), global (g), unique global (u), neither
|
2246 |
|
|
global nor local (a space) or both global and local (!). A
|
2247 |
|
|
symbol can be neither local or global for a variety of reasons, e.g.,
|
2248 |
|
|
because it is used for debugging, but it is probably an indication of
|
2249 |
|
|
a bug if it is ever both local and global. Unique global symbols are
|
2250 |
|
|
a GNU extension to the standard set of ELF symbol bindings. For such
|
2251 |
|
|
a symbol the dynamic linker will make sure that in the entire process
|
2252 |
|
|
there is just one symbol with this name and type in use.
|
2253 |
|
|
|
2254 |
|
|
@item w
|
2255 |
|
|
The symbol is weak (w) or strong (a space).
|
2256 |
|
|
|
2257 |
|
|
@item C
|
2258 |
|
|
The symbol denotes a constructor (C) or an ordinary symbol (a space).
|
2259 |
|
|
|
2260 |
|
|
@item W
|
2261 |
|
|
The symbol is a warning (W) or a normal symbol (a space). A warning
|
2262 |
|
|
symbol's name is a message to be displayed if the symbol following the
|
2263 |
|
|
warning symbol is ever referenced.
|
2264 |
|
|
|
2265 |
|
|
@item I
|
2266 |
|
|
@item i
|
2267 |
|
|
The symbol is an indirect reference to another symbol (I), a function
|
2268 |
|
|
to be evaluated during reloc processing (i) or a normal symbol (a
|
2269 |
|
|
space).
|
2270 |
|
|
|
2271 |
|
|
@item d
|
2272 |
|
|
@itemx D
|
2273 |
|
|
The symbol is a debugging symbol (d) or a dynamic symbol (D) or a
|
2274 |
|
|
normal symbol (a space).
|
2275 |
|
|
|
2276 |
|
|
@item F
|
2277 |
|
|
@item f
|
2278 |
|
|
@item O
|
2279 |
|
|
The symbol is the name of a function (F) or a file (f) or an object
|
2280 |
|
|
(O) or just a normal symbol (a space).
|
2281 |
|
|
@end table
|
2282 |
|
|
|
2283 |
|
|
@item -T
|
2284 |
|
|
@itemx --dynamic-syms
|
2285 |
|
|
@cindex dynamic symbol table entries, printing
|
2286 |
|
|
Print the dynamic symbol table entries of the file. This is only
|
2287 |
|
|
meaningful for dynamic objects, such as certain types of shared
|
2288 |
|
|
libraries. This is similar to the information provided by the @samp{nm}
|
2289 |
|
|
program when given the @option{-D} (@option{--dynamic}) option.
|
2290 |
|
|
|
2291 |
|
|
@item --special-syms
|
2292 |
|
|
When displaying symbols include those which the target considers to be
|
2293 |
|
|
special in some way and which would not normally be of interest to the
|
2294 |
|
|
user.
|
2295 |
|
|
|
2296 |
|
|
@item -V
|
2297 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
2298 |
|
|
Print the version number of @command{objdump} and exit.
|
2299 |
|
|
|
2300 |
|
|
@item -x
|
2301 |
|
|
@itemx --all-headers
|
2302 |
|
|
@cindex all header information, object file
|
2303 |
|
|
@cindex header information, all
|
2304 |
|
|
Display all available header information, including the symbol table and
|
2305 |
|
|
relocation entries. Using @option{-x} is equivalent to specifying all of
|
2306 |
|
|
@option{-a -f -h -p -r -t}.
|
2307 |
|
|
|
2308 |
|
|
@item -w
|
2309 |
|
|
@itemx --wide
|
2310 |
|
|
@cindex wide output, printing
|
2311 |
|
|
Format some lines for output devices that have more than 80 columns.
|
2312 |
|
|
Also do not truncate symbol names when they are displayed.
|
2313 |
|
|
|
2314 |
|
|
@item -z
|
2315 |
|
|
@itemx --disassemble-zeroes
|
2316 |
|
|
Normally the disassembly output will skip blocks of zeroes. This
|
2317 |
|
|
option directs the disassembler to disassemble those blocks, just like
|
2318 |
|
|
any other data.
|
2319 |
|
|
@end table
|
2320 |
|
|
|
2321 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2322 |
|
|
|
2323 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2324 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO objdump
|
2325 |
|
|
nm(1), readelf(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2326 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2327 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2328 |
|
|
|
2329 |
|
|
@node ranlib
|
2330 |
|
|
@chapter ranlib
|
2331 |
|
|
|
2332 |
|
|
@kindex ranlib
|
2333 |
|
|
@cindex archive contents
|
2334 |
|
|
@cindex symbol index
|
2335 |
|
|
|
2336 |
|
|
@c man title ranlib generate index to archive.
|
2337 |
|
|
|
2338 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2339 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS ranlib
|
2340 |
|
|
ranlib [@option{-vVt}] @var{archive}
|
2341 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2342 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2343 |
|
|
|
2344 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION ranlib
|
2345 |
|
|
|
2346 |
|
|
@command{ranlib} generates an index to the contents of an archive and
|
2347 |
|
|
stores it in the archive. The index lists each symbol defined by a
|
2348 |
|
|
member of an archive that is a relocatable object file.
|
2349 |
|
|
|
2350 |
|
|
You may use @samp{nm -s} or @samp{nm --print-armap} to list this index.
|
2351 |
|
|
|
2352 |
|
|
An archive with such an index speeds up linking to the library and
|
2353 |
|
|
allows routines in the library to call each other without regard to
|
2354 |
|
|
their placement in the archive.
|
2355 |
|
|
|
2356 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} @command{ranlib} program is another form of @sc{gnu} @command{ar}; running
|
2357 |
|
|
@command{ranlib} is completely equivalent to executing @samp{ar -s}.
|
2358 |
|
|
@xref{ar}.
|
2359 |
|
|
|
2360 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2361 |
|
|
|
2362 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS ranlib
|
2363 |
|
|
|
2364 |
|
|
@table @env
|
2365 |
|
|
@item -v
|
2366 |
|
|
@itemx -V
|
2367 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
2368 |
|
|
Show the version number of @command{ranlib}.
|
2369 |
|
|
|
2370 |
|
|
@item -t
|
2371 |
|
|
Update the timestamp of the symbol map of an archive.
|
2372 |
|
|
@end table
|
2373 |
|
|
|
2374 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2375 |
|
|
|
2376 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2377 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO ranlib
|
2378 |
|
|
ar(1), nm(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2379 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2380 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2381 |
|
|
|
2382 |
|
|
@node size
|
2383 |
|
|
@chapter size
|
2384 |
|
|
|
2385 |
|
|
@kindex size
|
2386 |
|
|
@cindex section sizes
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
@c man title size list section sizes and total size.
|
2389 |
|
|
|
2390 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2391 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS size
|
2392 |
|
|
size [@option{-A}|@option{-B}|@option{--format=}@var{compatibility}]
|
2393 |
|
|
[@option{--help}]
|
2394 |
|
|
[@option{-d}|@option{-o}|@option{-x}|@option{--radix=}@var{number}]
|
2395 |
|
|
[@option{--common}]
|
2396 |
|
|
[@option{-t}|@option{--totals}]
|
2397 |
|
|
[@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}] [@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
2398 |
|
|
[@var{objfile}@dots{}]
|
2399 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2400 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2401 |
|
|
|
2402 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION size
|
2403 |
|
|
|
2404 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} @command{size} utility lists the section sizes---and the total
|
2405 |
|
|
size---for each of the object or archive files @var{objfile} in its
|
2406 |
|
|
argument list. By default, one line of output is generated for each
|
2407 |
|
|
object file or each module in an archive.
|
2408 |
|
|
|
2409 |
|
|
@var{objfile}@dots{} are the object files to be examined.
|
2410 |
|
|
If none are specified, the file @code{a.out} will be used.
|
2411 |
|
|
|
2412 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2413 |
|
|
|
2414 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS size
|
2415 |
|
|
|
2416 |
|
|
The command line options have the following meanings:
|
2417 |
|
|
|
2418 |
|
|
@table @env
|
2419 |
|
|
@item -A
|
2420 |
|
|
@itemx -B
|
2421 |
|
|
@itemx --format=@var{compatibility}
|
2422 |
|
|
@cindex @command{size} display format
|
2423 |
|
|
Using one of these options, you can choose whether the output from @sc{gnu}
|
2424 |
|
|
@command{size} resembles output from System V @command{size} (using @option{-A},
|
2425 |
|
|
or @option{--format=sysv}), or Berkeley @command{size} (using @option{-B}, or
|
2426 |
|
|
@option{--format=berkeley}). The default is the one-line format similar to
|
2427 |
|
|
Berkeley's.
|
2428 |
|
|
@c Bonus for doc-source readers: you can also say --format=strange (or
|
2429 |
|
|
@c anything else that starts with 's') for sysv, and --format=boring (or
|
2430 |
|
|
@c anything else that starts with 'b') for Berkeley.
|
2431 |
|
|
|
2432 |
|
|
Here is an example of the Berkeley (default) format of output from
|
2433 |
|
|
@command{size}:
|
2434 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2435 |
|
|
$ size --format=Berkeley ranlib size
|
2436 |
|
|
text data bss dec hex filename
|
2437 |
|
|
294880 81920 11592 388392 5ed28 ranlib
|
2438 |
|
|
294880 81920 11888 388688 5ee50 size
|
2439 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2440 |
|
|
|
2441 |
|
|
@noindent
|
2442 |
|
|
This is the same data, but displayed closer to System V conventions:
|
2443 |
|
|
|
2444 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2445 |
|
|
$ size --format=SysV ranlib size
|
2446 |
|
|
ranlib :
|
2447 |
|
|
section size addr
|
2448 |
|
|
.text 294880 8192
|
2449 |
|
|
.data 81920 303104
|
2450 |
|
|
.bss 11592 385024
|
2451 |
|
|
Total 388392
|
2452 |
|
|
|
2453 |
|
|
|
2454 |
|
|
size :
|
2455 |
|
|
section size addr
|
2456 |
|
|
.text 294880 8192
|
2457 |
|
|
.data 81920 303104
|
2458 |
|
|
.bss 11888 385024
|
2459 |
|
|
Total 388688
|
2460 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2461 |
|
|
|
2462 |
|
|
@item --help
|
2463 |
|
|
Show a summary of acceptable arguments and options.
|
2464 |
|
|
|
2465 |
|
|
@item -d
|
2466 |
|
|
@itemx -o
|
2467 |
|
|
@itemx -x
|
2468 |
|
|
@itemx --radix=@var{number}
|
2469 |
|
|
@cindex @command{size} number format
|
2470 |
|
|
@cindex radix for section sizes
|
2471 |
|
|
Using one of these options, you can control whether the size of each
|
2472 |
|
|
section is given in decimal (@option{-d}, or @option{--radix=10}); octal
|
2473 |
|
|
(@option{-o}, or @option{--radix=8}); or hexadecimal (@option{-x}, or
|
2474 |
|
|
@option{--radix=16}). In @option{--radix=@var{number}}, only the three
|
2475 |
|
|
values (8, 10, 16) are supported. The total size is always given in two
|
2476 |
|
|
radices; decimal and hexadecimal for @option{-d} or @option{-x} output, or
|
2477 |
|
|
octal and hexadecimal if you're using @option{-o}.
|
2478 |
|
|
|
2479 |
|
|
@item --common
|
2480 |
|
|
Print total size of common symbols in each file. When using Berkeley
|
2481 |
|
|
format these are included in the bss size.
|
2482 |
|
|
|
2483 |
|
|
@item -t
|
2484 |
|
|
@itemx --totals
|
2485 |
|
|
Show totals of all objects listed (Berkeley format listing mode only).
|
2486 |
|
|
|
2487 |
|
|
@item --target=@var{bfdname}
|
2488 |
|
|
@cindex object code format
|
2489 |
|
|
Specify that the object-code format for @var{objfile} is
|
2490 |
|
|
@var{bfdname}. This option may not be necessary; @command{size} can
|
2491 |
|
|
automatically recognize many formats.
|
2492 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
2493 |
|
|
|
2494 |
|
|
@item -V
|
2495 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
2496 |
|
|
Display the version number of @command{size}.
|
2497 |
|
|
@end table
|
2498 |
|
|
|
2499 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2500 |
|
|
|
2501 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2502 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO size
|
2503 |
|
|
ar(1), objdump(1), readelf(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2504 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2505 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2506 |
|
|
|
2507 |
|
|
@node strings
|
2508 |
|
|
@chapter strings
|
2509 |
|
|
@kindex strings
|
2510 |
|
|
@cindex listings strings
|
2511 |
|
|
@cindex printing strings
|
2512 |
|
|
@cindex strings, printing
|
2513 |
|
|
|
2514 |
|
|
@c man title strings print the strings of printable characters in files.
|
2515 |
|
|
|
2516 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2517 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS strings
|
2518 |
|
|
strings [@option{-afovV}] [@option{-}@var{min-len}]
|
2519 |
|
|
[@option{-n} @var{min-len}] [@option{--bytes=}@var{min-len}]
|
2520 |
|
|
[@option{-t} @var{radix}] [@option{--radix=}@var{radix}]
|
2521 |
|
|
[@option{-e} @var{encoding}] [@option{--encoding=}@var{encoding}]
|
2522 |
|
|
[@option{-}] [@option{--all}] [@option{--print-file-name}]
|
2523 |
|
|
[@option{-T} @var{bfdname}] [@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
2524 |
|
|
[@option{--help}] [@option{--version}] @var{file}@dots{}
|
2525 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2526 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2527 |
|
|
|
2528 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION strings
|
2529 |
|
|
|
2530 |
|
|
For each @var{file} given, @sc{gnu} @command{strings} prints the printable
|
2531 |
|
|
character sequences that are at least 4 characters long (or the number
|
2532 |
|
|
given with the options below) and are followed by an unprintable
|
2533 |
|
|
character. By default, it only prints the strings from the initialized
|
2534 |
|
|
and loaded sections of object files; for other types of files, it prints
|
2535 |
|
|
the strings from the whole file.
|
2536 |
|
|
|
2537 |
|
|
@command{strings} is mainly useful for determining the contents of non-text
|
2538 |
|
|
files.
|
2539 |
|
|
|
2540 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2541 |
|
|
|
2542 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS strings
|
2543 |
|
|
|
2544 |
|
|
@table @env
|
2545 |
|
|
@item -a
|
2546 |
|
|
@itemx --all
|
2547 |
|
|
@itemx -
|
2548 |
|
|
Do not scan only the initialized and loaded sections of object files;
|
2549 |
|
|
scan the whole files.
|
2550 |
|
|
|
2551 |
|
|
@item -f
|
2552 |
|
|
@itemx --print-file-name
|
2553 |
|
|
Print the name of the file before each string.
|
2554 |
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
@item --help
|
2556 |
|
|
Print a summary of the program usage on the standard output and exit.
|
2557 |
|
|
|
2558 |
|
|
@item -@var{min-len}
|
2559 |
|
|
@itemx -n @var{min-len}
|
2560 |
|
|
@itemx --bytes=@var{min-len}
|
2561 |
|
|
Print sequences of characters that are at least @var{min-len} characters
|
2562 |
|
|
long, instead of the default 4.
|
2563 |
|
|
|
2564 |
|
|
@item -o
|
2565 |
|
|
Like @samp{-t o}. Some other versions of @command{strings} have @option{-o}
|
2566 |
|
|
act like @samp{-t d} instead. Since we can not be compatible with both
|
2567 |
|
|
ways, we simply chose one.
|
2568 |
|
|
|
2569 |
|
|
@item -t @var{radix}
|
2570 |
|
|
@itemx --radix=@var{radix}
|
2571 |
|
|
Print the offset within the file before each string. The single
|
2572 |
|
|
character argument specifies the radix of the offset---@samp{o} for
|
2573 |
|
|
octal, @samp{x} for hexadecimal, or @samp{d} for decimal.
|
2574 |
|
|
|
2575 |
|
|
@item -e @var{encoding}
|
2576 |
|
|
@itemx --encoding=@var{encoding}
|
2577 |
|
|
Select the character encoding of the strings that are to be found.
|
2578 |
|
|
Possible values for @var{encoding} are: @samp{s} = single-7-bit-byte
|
2579 |
|
|
characters (ASCII, ISO 8859, etc., default), @samp{S} =
|
2580 |
|
|
single-8-bit-byte characters, @samp{b} = 16-bit bigendian, @samp{l} =
|
2581 |
|
|
16-bit littleendian, @samp{B} = 32-bit bigendian, @samp{L} = 32-bit
|
2582 |
|
|
littleendian. Useful for finding wide character strings. (@samp{l}
|
2583 |
|
|
and @samp{b} apply to, for example, Unicode UTF-16/UCS-2 encodings).
|
2584 |
|
|
|
2585 |
|
|
@item -T @var{bfdname}
|
2586 |
|
|
@itemx --target=@var{bfdname}
|
2587 |
|
|
@cindex object code format
|
2588 |
|
|
Specify an object code format other than your system's default format.
|
2589 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
2590 |
|
|
|
2591 |
|
|
@item -v
|
2592 |
|
|
@itemx -V
|
2593 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
2594 |
|
|
Print the program version number on the standard output and exit.
|
2595 |
|
|
@end table
|
2596 |
|
|
|
2597 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2598 |
|
|
|
2599 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2600 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO strings
|
2601 |
|
|
ar(1), nm(1), objdump(1), ranlib(1), readelf(1)
|
2602 |
|
|
and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2603 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2604 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2605 |
|
|
|
2606 |
|
|
@node strip
|
2607 |
|
|
@chapter strip
|
2608 |
|
|
|
2609 |
|
|
@kindex strip
|
2610 |
|
|
@cindex removing symbols
|
2611 |
|
|
@cindex discarding symbols
|
2612 |
|
|
@cindex symbols, discarding
|
2613 |
|
|
|
2614 |
|
|
@c man title strip Discard symbols from object files.
|
2615 |
|
|
|
2616 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2617 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS strip
|
2618 |
|
|
strip [@option{-F} @var{bfdname} |@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
2619 |
|
|
[@option{-I} @var{bfdname} |@option{--input-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
2620 |
|
|
[@option{-O} @var{bfdname} |@option{--output-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
2621 |
|
|
[@option{-s}|@option{--strip-all}]
|
2622 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{-g}|@option{-d}|@option{--strip-debug}]
|
2623 |
|
|
[@option{-K} @var{symbolname} |@option{--keep-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
2624 |
|
|
[@option{-N} @var{symbolname} |@option{--strip-symbol=}@var{symbolname}]
|
2625 |
|
|
[@option{-w}|@option{--wildcard}]
|
2626 |
|
|
[@option{-x}|@option{--discard-all}] [@option{-X} |@option{--discard-locals}]
|
2627 |
|
|
[@option{-R} @var{sectionname} |@option{--remove-section=}@var{sectionname}]
|
2628 |
|
|
[@option{-o} @var{file}] [@option{-p}|@option{--preserve-dates}]
|
2629 |
|
|
[@option{--keep-file-symbols}]
|
2630 |
|
|
[@option{--only-keep-debug}]
|
2631 |
|
|
[@option{-v} |@option{--verbose}] [@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
2632 |
|
|
[@option{--help}] [@option{--info}]
|
2633 |
|
|
@var{objfile}@dots{}
|
2634 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2635 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2636 |
|
|
|
2637 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION strip
|
2638 |
|
|
|
2639 |
|
|
@sc{gnu} @command{strip} discards all symbols from object files
|
2640 |
|
|
@var{objfile}. The list of object files may include archives.
|
2641 |
|
|
At least one object file must be given.
|
2642 |
|
|
|
2643 |
|
|
@command{strip} modifies the files named in its argument,
|
2644 |
|
|
rather than writing modified copies under different names.
|
2645 |
|
|
|
2646 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2647 |
|
|
|
2648 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS strip
|
2649 |
|
|
|
2650 |
|
|
@table @env
|
2651 |
|
|
@item -F @var{bfdname}
|
2652 |
|
|
@itemx --target=@var{bfdname}
|
2653 |
|
|
Treat the original @var{objfile} as a file with the object
|
2654 |
|
|
code format @var{bfdname}, and rewrite it in the same format.
|
2655 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
2656 |
|
|
|
2657 |
|
|
@item --help
|
2658 |
|
|
Show a summary of the options to @command{strip} and exit.
|
2659 |
|
|
|
2660 |
|
|
@item --info
|
2661 |
|
|
Display a list showing all architectures and object formats available.
|
2662 |
|
|
|
2663 |
|
|
@item -I @var{bfdname}
|
2664 |
|
|
@itemx --input-target=@var{bfdname}
|
2665 |
|
|
Treat the original @var{objfile} as a file with the object
|
2666 |
|
|
code format @var{bfdname}.
|
2667 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
2668 |
|
|
|
2669 |
|
|
@item -O @var{bfdname}
|
2670 |
|
|
@itemx --output-target=@var{bfdname}
|
2671 |
|
|
Replace @var{objfile} with a file in the output format @var{bfdname}.
|
2672 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
2673 |
|
|
|
2674 |
|
|
@item -R @var{sectionname}
|
2675 |
|
|
@itemx --remove-section=@var{sectionname}
|
2676 |
|
|
Remove any section named @var{sectionname} from the output file. This
|
2677 |
|
|
option may be given more than once. Note that using this option
|
2678 |
|
|
inappropriately may make the output file unusable.
|
2679 |
|
|
|
2680 |
|
|
@item -s
|
2681 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-all
|
2682 |
|
|
Remove all symbols.
|
2683 |
|
|
|
2684 |
|
|
@item -g
|
2685 |
|
|
@itemx -S
|
2686 |
|
|
@itemx -d
|
2687 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-debug
|
2688 |
|
|
Remove debugging symbols only.
|
2689 |
|
|
|
2690 |
|
|
@item --strip-unneeded
|
2691 |
|
|
Remove all symbols that are not needed for relocation processing.
|
2692 |
|
|
|
2693 |
|
|
@item -K @var{symbolname}
|
2694 |
|
|
@itemx --keep-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
2695 |
|
|
When stripping symbols, keep symbol @var{symbolname} even if it would
|
2696 |
|
|
normally be stripped. This option may be given more than once.
|
2697 |
|
|
|
2698 |
|
|
@item -N @var{symbolname}
|
2699 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-symbol=@var{symbolname}
|
2700 |
|
|
Remove symbol @var{symbolname} from the source file. This option may be
|
2701 |
|
|
given more than once, and may be combined with strip options other than
|
2702 |
|
|
@option{-K}.
|
2703 |
|
|
|
2704 |
|
|
@item -o @var{file}
|
2705 |
|
|
Put the stripped output in @var{file}, rather than replacing the
|
2706 |
|
|
existing file. When this argument is used, only one @var{objfile}
|
2707 |
|
|
argument may be specified.
|
2708 |
|
|
|
2709 |
|
|
@item -p
|
2710 |
|
|
@itemx --preserve-dates
|
2711 |
|
|
Preserve the access and modification dates of the file.
|
2712 |
|
|
|
2713 |
|
|
@item -w
|
2714 |
|
|
@itemx --wildcard
|
2715 |
|
|
Permit regular expressions in @var{symbolname}s used in other command
|
2716 |
|
|
line options. The question mark (?), asterisk (*), backslash (\) and
|
2717 |
|
|
square brackets ([]) operators can be used anywhere in the symbol
|
2718 |
|
|
name. If the first character of the symbol name is the exclamation
|
2719 |
|
|
point (!) then the sense of the switch is reversed for that symbol.
|
2720 |
|
|
For example:
|
2721 |
|
|
|
2722 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2723 |
|
|
-w -K !foo -K fo*
|
2724 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2725 |
|
|
|
2726 |
|
|
would cause strip to only keep symbols that start with the letters
|
2727 |
|
|
``fo'', but to discard the symbol ``foo''.
|
2728 |
|
|
|
2729 |
|
|
@item -x
|
2730 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-all
|
2731 |
|
|
Remove non-global symbols.
|
2732 |
|
|
|
2733 |
|
|
@item -X
|
2734 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-locals
|
2735 |
|
|
Remove compiler-generated local symbols.
|
2736 |
|
|
(These usually start with @samp{L} or @samp{.}.)
|
2737 |
|
|
|
2738 |
|
|
@item --keep-file-symbols
|
2739 |
|
|
When stripping a file, perhaps with @option{--strip-debug} or
|
2740 |
|
|
@option{--strip-unneeded}, retain any symbols specifying source file names,
|
2741 |
|
|
which would otherwise get stripped.
|
2742 |
|
|
|
2743 |
|
|
@item --only-keep-debug
|
2744 |
|
|
Strip a file, removing contents of any sections that would not be
|
2745 |
|
|
stripped by @option{--strip-debug} and leaving the debugging sections
|
2746 |
|
|
intact. In ELF files, this preserves all note sections in the output.
|
2747 |
|
|
|
2748 |
|
|
The intention is that this option will be used in conjunction with
|
2749 |
|
|
@option{--add-gnu-debuglink} to create a two part executable. One a
|
2750 |
|
|
stripped binary which will occupy less space in RAM and in a
|
2751 |
|
|
distribution and the second a debugging information file which is only
|
2752 |
|
|
needed if debugging abilities are required. The suggested procedure
|
2753 |
|
|
to create these files is as follows:
|
2754 |
|
|
|
2755 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
2756 |
|
|
@item Link the executable as normal. Assuming that is is called
|
2757 |
|
|
@code{foo} then...
|
2758 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --only-keep-debug foo foo.dbg} to
|
2759 |
|
|
create a file containing the debugging info.
|
2760 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --strip-debug foo} to create a
|
2761 |
|
|
stripped executable.
|
2762 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.dbg foo}
|
2763 |
|
|
to add a link to the debugging info into the stripped executable.
|
2764 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
2765 |
|
|
|
2766 |
|
|
Note---the choice of @code{.dbg} as an extension for the debug info
|
2767 |
|
|
file is arbitrary. Also the @code{--only-keep-debug} step is
|
2768 |
|
|
optional. You could instead do this:
|
2769 |
|
|
|
2770 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
2771 |
|
|
@item Link the executable as normal.
|
2772 |
|
|
@item Copy @code{foo} to @code{foo.full}
|
2773 |
|
|
@item Run @code{strip --strip-debug foo}
|
2774 |
|
|
@item Run @code{objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.full foo}
|
2775 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
2776 |
|
|
|
2777 |
|
|
i.e., the file pointed to by the @option{--add-gnu-debuglink} can be the
|
2778 |
|
|
full executable. It does not have to be a file created by the
|
2779 |
|
|
@option{--only-keep-debug} switch.
|
2780 |
|
|
|
2781 |
|
|
Note---this switch is only intended for use on fully linked files. It
|
2782 |
|
|
does not make sense to use it on object files where the debugging
|
2783 |
|
|
information may be incomplete. Besides the gnu_debuglink feature
|
2784 |
|
|
currently only supports the presence of one filename containing
|
2785 |
|
|
debugging information, not multiple filenames on a one-per-object-file
|
2786 |
|
|
basis.
|
2787 |
|
|
|
2788 |
|
|
@item -V
|
2789 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
2790 |
|
|
Show the version number for @command{strip}.
|
2791 |
|
|
|
2792 |
|
|
@item -v
|
2793 |
|
|
@itemx --verbose
|
2794 |
|
|
Verbose output: list all object files modified. In the case of
|
2795 |
|
|
archives, @samp{strip -v} lists all members of the archive.
|
2796 |
|
|
@end table
|
2797 |
|
|
|
2798 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2799 |
|
|
|
2800 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2801 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO strip
|
2802 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2803 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2804 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2805 |
|
|
|
2806 |
|
|
@node c++filt, addr2line, elfedit, Top
|
2807 |
|
|
@chapter c++filt
|
2808 |
|
|
|
2809 |
|
|
@kindex c++filt
|
2810 |
|
|
@cindex demangling C++ symbols
|
2811 |
|
|
|
2812 |
|
|
@c man title cxxfilt Demangle C++ and Java symbols.
|
2813 |
|
|
|
2814 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2815 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS cxxfilt
|
2816 |
|
|
c++filt [@option{-_}|@option{--strip-underscores}]
|
2817 |
|
|
[@option{-n}|@option{--no-strip-underscores}]
|
2818 |
|
|
[@option{-p}|@option{--no-params}]
|
2819 |
|
|
[@option{-t}|@option{--types}]
|
2820 |
|
|
[@option{-i}|@option{--no-verbose}]
|
2821 |
|
|
[@option{-s} @var{format}|@option{--format=}@var{format}]
|
2822 |
|
|
[@option{--help}] [@option{--version}] [@var{symbol}@dots{}]
|
2823 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2824 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2825 |
|
|
|
2826 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION cxxfilt
|
2827 |
|
|
|
2828 |
|
|
@kindex cxxfilt
|
2829 |
|
|
The C++ and Java languages provide function overloading, which means
|
2830 |
|
|
that you can write many functions with the same name, providing that
|
2831 |
|
|
each function takes parameters of different types. In order to be
|
2832 |
|
|
able to distinguish these similarly named functions C++ and Java
|
2833 |
|
|
encode them into a low-level assembler name which uniquely identifies
|
2834 |
|
|
each different version. This process is known as @dfn{mangling}. The
|
2835 |
|
|
@command{c++filt}
|
2836 |
|
|
@footnote{MS-DOS does not allow @kbd{+} characters in file names, so on
|
2837 |
|
|
MS-DOS this program is named @command{CXXFILT}.}
|
2838 |
|
|
program does the inverse mapping: it decodes (@dfn{demangles}) low-level
|
2839 |
|
|
names into user-level names so that they can be read.
|
2840 |
|
|
|
2841 |
|
|
Every alphanumeric word (consisting of letters, digits, underscores,
|
2842 |
|
|
dollars, or periods) seen in the input is a potential mangled name.
|
2843 |
|
|
If the name decodes into a C++ name, the C++ name replaces the
|
2844 |
|
|
low-level name in the output, otherwise the original word is output.
|
2845 |
|
|
In this way you can pass an entire assembler source file, containing
|
2846 |
|
|
mangled names, through @command{c++filt} and see the same source file
|
2847 |
|
|
containing demangled names.
|
2848 |
|
|
|
2849 |
|
|
You can also use @command{c++filt} to decipher individual symbols by
|
2850 |
|
|
passing them on the command line:
|
2851 |
|
|
|
2852 |
|
|
@example
|
2853 |
|
|
c++filt @var{symbol}
|
2854 |
|
|
@end example
|
2855 |
|
|
|
2856 |
|
|
If no @var{symbol} arguments are given, @command{c++filt} reads symbol
|
2857 |
|
|
names from the standard input instead. All the results are printed on
|
2858 |
|
|
the standard output. The difference between reading names from the
|
2859 |
|
|
command line versus reading names from the standard input is that
|
2860 |
|
|
command line arguments are expected to be just mangled names and no
|
2861 |
|
|
checking is performed to separate them from surrounding text. Thus
|
2862 |
|
|
for example:
|
2863 |
|
|
|
2864 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2865 |
|
|
c++filt -n _Z1fv
|
2866 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2867 |
|
|
|
2868 |
|
|
will work and demangle the name to ``f()'' whereas:
|
2869 |
|
|
|
2870 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2871 |
|
|
c++filt -n _Z1fv,
|
2872 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2873 |
|
|
|
2874 |
|
|
will not work. (Note the extra comma at the end of the mangled
|
2875 |
|
|
name which makes it invalid). This command however will work:
|
2876 |
|
|
|
2877 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2878 |
|
|
echo _Z1fv, | c++filt -n
|
2879 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2880 |
|
|
|
2881 |
|
|
and will display ``f(),'', i.e., the demangled name followed by a
|
2882 |
|
|
trailing comma. This behaviour is because when the names are read
|
2883 |
|
|
from the standard input it is expected that they might be part of an
|
2884 |
|
|
assembler source file where there might be extra, extraneous
|
2885 |
|
|
characters trailing after a mangled name. For example:
|
2886 |
|
|
|
2887 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2888 |
|
|
.type _Z1fv, @@function
|
2889 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2890 |
|
|
|
2891 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2892 |
|
|
|
2893 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS cxxfilt
|
2894 |
|
|
|
2895 |
|
|
@table @env
|
2896 |
|
|
@item -_
|
2897 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-underscores
|
2898 |
|
|
On some systems, both the C and C++ compilers put an underscore in front
|
2899 |
|
|
of every name. For example, the C name @code{foo} gets the low-level
|
2900 |
|
|
name @code{_foo}. This option removes the initial underscore. Whether
|
2901 |
|
|
@command{c++filt} removes the underscore by default is target dependent.
|
2902 |
|
|
|
2903 |
|
|
@item -n
|
2904 |
|
|
@itemx --no-strip-underscores
|
2905 |
|
|
Do not remove the initial underscore.
|
2906 |
|
|
|
2907 |
|
|
@item -p
|
2908 |
|
|
@itemx --no-params
|
2909 |
|
|
When demangling the name of a function, do not display the types of
|
2910 |
|
|
the function's parameters.
|
2911 |
|
|
|
2912 |
|
|
@item -t
|
2913 |
|
|
@itemx --types
|
2914 |
|
|
Attempt to demangle types as well as function names. This is disabled
|
2915 |
|
|
by default since mangled types are normally only used internally in
|
2916 |
|
|
the compiler, and they can be confused with non-mangled names. For example,
|
2917 |
|
|
a function called ``a'' treated as a mangled type name would be
|
2918 |
|
|
demangled to ``signed char''.
|
2919 |
|
|
|
2920 |
|
|
@item -i
|
2921 |
|
|
@itemx --no-verbose
|
2922 |
|
|
Do not include implementation details (if any) in the demangled
|
2923 |
|
|
output.
|
2924 |
|
|
|
2925 |
|
|
@item -s @var{format}
|
2926 |
|
|
@itemx --format=@var{format}
|
2927 |
|
|
@command{c++filt} can decode various methods of mangling, used by
|
2928 |
|
|
different compilers. The argument to this option selects which
|
2929 |
|
|
method it uses:
|
2930 |
|
|
|
2931 |
|
|
@table @code
|
2932 |
|
|
@item auto
|
2933 |
|
|
Automatic selection based on executable (the default method)
|
2934 |
|
|
@item gnu
|
2935 |
|
|
the one used by the @sc{gnu} C++ compiler (g++)
|
2936 |
|
|
@item lucid
|
2937 |
|
|
the one used by the Lucid compiler (lcc)
|
2938 |
|
|
@item arm
|
2939 |
|
|
the one specified by the C++ Annotated Reference Manual
|
2940 |
|
|
@item hp
|
2941 |
|
|
the one used by the HP compiler (aCC)
|
2942 |
|
|
@item edg
|
2943 |
|
|
the one used by the EDG compiler
|
2944 |
|
|
@item gnu-v3
|
2945 |
|
|
the one used by the @sc{gnu} C++ compiler (g++) with the V3 ABI.
|
2946 |
|
|
@item java
|
2947 |
|
|
the one used by the @sc{gnu} Java compiler (gcj)
|
2948 |
|
|
@item gnat
|
2949 |
|
|
the one used by the @sc{gnu} Ada compiler (GNAT).
|
2950 |
|
|
@end table
|
2951 |
|
|
|
2952 |
|
|
@item --help
|
2953 |
|
|
Print a summary of the options to @command{c++filt} and exit.
|
2954 |
|
|
|
2955 |
|
|
@item --version
|
2956 |
|
|
Print the version number of @command{c++filt} and exit.
|
2957 |
|
|
@end table
|
2958 |
|
|
|
2959 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2960 |
|
|
|
2961 |
|
|
@ignore
|
2962 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO cxxfilt
|
2963 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
2964 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2965 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
2966 |
|
|
|
2967 |
|
|
@quotation
|
2968 |
|
|
@emph{Warning:} @command{c++filt} is a new utility, and the details of its
|
2969 |
|
|
user interface are subject to change in future releases. In particular,
|
2970 |
|
|
a command-line option may be required in the future to decode a name
|
2971 |
|
|
passed as an argument on the command line; in other words,
|
2972 |
|
|
|
2973 |
|
|
@example
|
2974 |
|
|
c++filt @var{symbol}
|
2975 |
|
|
@end example
|
2976 |
|
|
|
2977 |
|
|
@noindent
|
2978 |
|
|
may in a future release become
|
2979 |
|
|
|
2980 |
|
|
@example
|
2981 |
|
|
c++filt @var{option} @var{symbol}
|
2982 |
|
|
@end example
|
2983 |
|
|
@end quotation
|
2984 |
|
|
|
2985 |
|
|
@node addr2line
|
2986 |
|
|
@chapter addr2line
|
2987 |
|
|
|
2988 |
|
|
@kindex addr2line
|
2989 |
|
|
@cindex address to file name and line number
|
2990 |
|
|
|
2991 |
|
|
@c man title addr2line convert addresses into file names and line numbers.
|
2992 |
|
|
|
2993 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2994 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS addr2line
|
2995 |
|
|
addr2line [@option{-a}|@option{--addresses}]
|
2996 |
|
|
[@option{-b} @var{bfdname}|@option{--target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
2997 |
|
|
[@option{-C}|@option{--demangle}[=@var{style}]]
|
2998 |
|
|
[@option{-e} @var{filename}|@option{--exe=}@var{filename}]
|
2999 |
|
|
[@option{-f}|@option{--functions}] [@option{-s}|@option{--basename}]
|
3000 |
|
|
[@option{-i}|@option{--inlines}]
|
3001 |
|
|
[@option{-p}|@option{--pretty-print}]
|
3002 |
|
|
[@option{-j}|@option{--section=}@var{name}]
|
3003 |
|
|
[@option{-H}|@option{--help}] [@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
3004 |
|
|
[addr addr @dots{}]
|
3005 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3006 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3007 |
|
|
|
3008 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION addr2line
|
3009 |
|
|
|
3010 |
|
|
@command{addr2line} translates addresses into file names and line numbers.
|
3011 |
|
|
Given an address in an executable or an offset in a section of a relocatable
|
3012 |
|
|
object, it uses the debugging information to figure out which file name and
|
3013 |
|
|
line number are associated with it.
|
3014 |
|
|
|
3015 |
|
|
The executable or relocatable object to use is specified with the @option{-e}
|
3016 |
|
|
option. The default is the file @file{a.out}. The section in the relocatable
|
3017 |
|
|
object to use is specified with the @option{-j} option.
|
3018 |
|
|
|
3019 |
|
|
@command{addr2line} has two modes of operation.
|
3020 |
|
|
|
3021 |
|
|
In the first, hexadecimal addresses are specified on the command line,
|
3022 |
|
|
and @command{addr2line} displays the file name and line number for each
|
3023 |
|
|
address.
|
3024 |
|
|
|
3025 |
|
|
In the second, @command{addr2line} reads hexadecimal addresses from
|
3026 |
|
|
standard input, and prints the file name and line number for each
|
3027 |
|
|
address on standard output. In this mode, @command{addr2line} may be used
|
3028 |
|
|
in a pipe to convert dynamically chosen addresses.
|
3029 |
|
|
|
3030 |
|
|
The format of the output is @samp{FILENAME:LINENO}. The file name and
|
3031 |
|
|
line number for each address is printed on a separate line. If the
|
3032 |
|
|
@command{-f} option is used, then each @samp{FILENAME:LINENO} line is
|
3033 |
|
|
preceded by a @samp{FUNCTIONNAME} line which is the name of the function
|
3034 |
|
|
containing the address. If the @command{-a} option is used, then the
|
3035 |
|
|
address read is first printed.
|
3036 |
|
|
|
3037 |
|
|
If the file name or function name can not be determined,
|
3038 |
|
|
@command{addr2line} will print two question marks in their place. If the
|
3039 |
|
|
line number can not be determined, @command{addr2line} will print 0.
|
3040 |
|
|
|
3041 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3042 |
|
|
|
3043 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS addr2line
|
3044 |
|
|
|
3045 |
|
|
The long and short forms of options, shown here as alternatives, are
|
3046 |
|
|
equivalent.
|
3047 |
|
|
|
3048 |
|
|
@table @env
|
3049 |
|
|
@item -a
|
3050 |
|
|
@itemx --addresses
|
3051 |
|
|
Display address before function names or file and line number
|
3052 |
|
|
information. The address is printed with a @samp{0x} prefix to easily
|
3053 |
|
|
identify it.
|
3054 |
|
|
|
3055 |
|
|
@item -b @var{bfdname}
|
3056 |
|
|
@itemx --target=@var{bfdname}
|
3057 |
|
|
@cindex object code format
|
3058 |
|
|
Specify that the object-code format for the object files is
|
3059 |
|
|
@var{bfdname}.
|
3060 |
|
|
|
3061 |
|
|
@item -C
|
3062 |
|
|
@itemx --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
3063 |
|
|
@cindex demangling in objdump
|
3064 |
|
|
Decode (@dfn{demangle}) low-level symbol names into user-level names.
|
3065 |
|
|
Besides removing any initial underscore prepended by the system, this
|
3066 |
|
|
makes C++ function names readable. Different compilers have different
|
3067 |
|
|
mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used to
|
3068 |
|
|
choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. @xref{c++filt},
|
3069 |
|
|
for more information on demangling.
|
3070 |
|
|
|
3071 |
|
|
@item -e @var{filename}
|
3072 |
|
|
@itemx --exe=@var{filename}
|
3073 |
|
|
Specify the name of the executable for which addresses should be
|
3074 |
|
|
translated. The default file is @file{a.out}.
|
3075 |
|
|
|
3076 |
|
|
@item -f
|
3077 |
|
|
@itemx --functions
|
3078 |
|
|
Display function names as well as file and line number information.
|
3079 |
|
|
|
3080 |
|
|
@item -s
|
3081 |
|
|
@itemx --basenames
|
3082 |
|
|
Display only the base of each file name.
|
3083 |
|
|
|
3084 |
|
|
@item -i
|
3085 |
|
|
@itemx --inlines
|
3086 |
|
|
If the address belongs to a function that was inlined, the source
|
3087 |
|
|
information for all enclosing scopes back to the first non-inlined
|
3088 |
|
|
function will also be printed. For example, if @code{main} inlines
|
3089 |
|
|
@code{callee1} which inlines @code{callee2}, and address is from
|
3090 |
|
|
@code{callee2}, the source information for @code{callee1} and @code{main}
|
3091 |
|
|
will also be printed.
|
3092 |
|
|
|
3093 |
|
|
@item -j
|
3094 |
|
|
@itemx --section
|
3095 |
|
|
Read offsets relative to the specified section instead of absolute addresses.
|
3096 |
|
|
|
3097 |
|
|
@item -p
|
3098 |
|
|
@itemx --pretty-print
|
3099 |
|
|
Make the output more human friendly: each location are printed on one line.
|
3100 |
|
|
If option @option{-i} is specified, lines for all enclosing scopes are
|
3101 |
|
|
prefixed with @samp{(inlined by)}.
|
3102 |
|
|
@end table
|
3103 |
|
|
|
3104 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3105 |
|
|
|
3106 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3107 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO addr2line
|
3108 |
|
|
Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
3109 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3110 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3111 |
|
|
|
3112 |
|
|
@node nlmconv
|
3113 |
|
|
@chapter nlmconv
|
3114 |
|
|
|
3115 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} converts a relocatable object file into a NetWare
|
3116 |
|
|
Loadable Module.
|
3117 |
|
|
|
3118 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3119 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} currently works with @samp{i386} object
|
3120 |
|
|
files in @code{coff}, @sc{elf}, or @code{a.out} format, and @sc{SPARC}
|
3121 |
|
|
object files in @sc{elf}, or @code{a.out} format@footnote{
|
3122 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} should work with any @samp{i386} or @sc{sparc} object
|
3123 |
|
|
format in the Binary File Descriptor library. It has only been tested
|
3124 |
|
|
with the above formats.}.
|
3125 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3126 |
|
|
|
3127 |
|
|
@quotation
|
3128 |
|
|
@emph{Warning:} @command{nlmconv} is not always built as part of the binary
|
3129 |
|
|
utilities, since it is only useful for NLM targets.
|
3130 |
|
|
@end quotation
|
3131 |
|
|
|
3132 |
|
|
@c man title nlmconv converts object code into an NLM.
|
3133 |
|
|
|
3134 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3135 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS nlmconv
|
3136 |
|
|
nlmconv [@option{-I} @var{bfdname}|@option{--input-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
3137 |
|
|
[@option{-O} @var{bfdname}|@option{--output-target=}@var{bfdname}]
|
3138 |
|
|
[@option{-T} @var{headerfile}|@option{--header-file=}@var{headerfile}]
|
3139 |
|
|
[@option{-d}|@option{--debug}] [@option{-l} @var{linker}|@option{--linker=}@var{linker}]
|
3140 |
|
|
[@option{-h}|@option{--help}] [@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
3141 |
|
|
@var{infile} @var{outfile}
|
3142 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3143 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3144 |
|
|
|
3145 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION nlmconv
|
3146 |
|
|
|
3147 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} converts the relocatable @samp{i386} object file
|
3148 |
|
|
@var{infile} into the NetWare Loadable Module @var{outfile}, optionally
|
3149 |
|
|
reading @var{headerfile} for NLM header information. For instructions
|
3150 |
|
|
on writing the NLM command file language used in header files, see the
|
3151 |
|
|
@samp{linkers} section, @samp{NLMLINK} in particular, of the @cite{NLM
|
3152 |
|
|
Development and Tools Overview}, which is part of the NLM Software
|
3153 |
|
|
Developer's Kit (``NLM SDK''), available from Novell, Inc.
|
3154 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} uses the @sc{gnu} Binary File Descriptor library to read
|
3155 |
|
|
@var{infile};
|
3156 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
3157 |
|
|
see @ref{BFD,,BFD,ld.info,Using LD}, for more information.
|
3158 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
3159 |
|
|
|
3160 |
|
|
@command{nlmconv} can perform a link step. In other words, you can list
|
3161 |
|
|
more than one object file for input if you list them in the definitions
|
3162 |
|
|
file (rather than simply specifying one input file on the command line).
|
3163 |
|
|
In this case, @command{nlmconv} calls the linker for you.
|
3164 |
|
|
|
3165 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3166 |
|
|
|
3167 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS nlmconv
|
3168 |
|
|
|
3169 |
|
|
@table @env
|
3170 |
|
|
@item -I @var{bfdname}
|
3171 |
|
|
@itemx --input-target=@var{bfdname}
|
3172 |
|
|
Object format of the input file. @command{nlmconv} can usually determine
|
3173 |
|
|
the format of a given file (so no default is necessary).
|
3174 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
3175 |
|
|
|
3176 |
|
|
@item -O @var{bfdname}
|
3177 |
|
|
@itemx --output-target=@var{bfdname}
|
3178 |
|
|
Object format of the output file. @command{nlmconv} infers the output
|
3179 |
|
|
format based on the input format, e.g. for a @samp{i386} input file the
|
3180 |
|
|
output format is @samp{nlm32-i386}.
|
3181 |
|
|
@xref{Target Selection}, for more information.
|
3182 |
|
|
|
3183 |
|
|
@item -T @var{headerfile}
|
3184 |
|
|
@itemx --header-file=@var{headerfile}
|
3185 |
|
|
Reads @var{headerfile} for NLM header information. For instructions on
|
3186 |
|
|
writing the NLM command file language used in header files, see@ see the
|
3187 |
|
|
@samp{linkers} section, of the @cite{NLM Development and Tools
|
3188 |
|
|
Overview}, which is part of the NLM Software Developer's Kit, available
|
3189 |
|
|
from Novell, Inc.
|
3190 |
|
|
|
3191 |
|
|
@item -d
|
3192 |
|
|
@itemx --debug
|
3193 |
|
|
Displays (on standard error) the linker command line used by @command{nlmconv}.
|
3194 |
|
|
|
3195 |
|
|
@item -l @var{linker}
|
3196 |
|
|
@itemx --linker=@var{linker}
|
3197 |
|
|
Use @var{linker} for any linking. @var{linker} can be an absolute or a
|
3198 |
|
|
relative pathname.
|
3199 |
|
|
|
3200 |
|
|
@item -h
|
3201 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
3202 |
|
|
Prints a usage summary.
|
3203 |
|
|
|
3204 |
|
|
@item -V
|
3205 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
3206 |
|
|
Prints the version number for @command{nlmconv}.
|
3207 |
|
|
@end table
|
3208 |
|
|
|
3209 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3210 |
|
|
|
3211 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3212 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO nlmconv
|
3213 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
3214 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3215 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3216 |
|
|
|
3217 |
|
|
@node windmc
|
3218 |
|
|
@chapter windmc
|
3219 |
|
|
|
3220 |
|
|
@command{windmc} may be used to generator Windows message resources.
|
3221 |
|
|
|
3222 |
|
|
@quotation
|
3223 |
|
|
@emph{Warning:} @command{windmc} is not always built as part of the binary
|
3224 |
|
|
utilities, since it is only useful for Windows targets.
|
3225 |
|
|
@end quotation
|
3226 |
|
|
|
3227 |
|
|
@c man title windmc generates Windows message resources.
|
3228 |
|
|
|
3229 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3230 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS windmc
|
3231 |
|
|
windmc [options] input-file
|
3232 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3233 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3234 |
|
|
|
3235 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION windmc
|
3236 |
|
|
|
3237 |
|
|
@command{windmc} reads message definitions from an input file (.mc) and
|
3238 |
|
|
translate them into a set of output files. The output files may be of
|
3239 |
|
|
four kinds:
|
3240 |
|
|
|
3241 |
|
|
@table @code
|
3242 |
|
|
@item h
|
3243 |
|
|
A C header file containing the message definitions.
|
3244 |
|
|
|
3245 |
|
|
@item rc
|
3246 |
|
|
A resource file compilable by the @command{windres} tool.
|
3247 |
|
|
|
3248 |
|
|
@item bin
|
3249 |
|
|
One or more binary files containing the resource data for a specific
|
3250 |
|
|
message language.
|
3251 |
|
|
|
3252 |
|
|
@item dbg
|
3253 |
|
|
A C include file that maps message id's to their symbolic name.
|
3254 |
|
|
@end table
|
3255 |
|
|
|
3256 |
|
|
The exact description of these different formats is available in
|
3257 |
|
|
documentation from Microsoft.
|
3258 |
|
|
|
3259 |
|
|
When @command{windmc} converts from the @code{mc} format to the @code{bin}
|
3260 |
|
|
format, @code{rc}, @code{h}, and optional @code{dbg} it is acting like the
|
3261 |
|
|
Windows Message Compiler.
|
3262 |
|
|
|
3263 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3264 |
|
|
|
3265 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS windmc
|
3266 |
|
|
|
3267 |
|
|
@table @env
|
3268 |
|
|
@item -a
|
3269 |
|
|
@itemx --ascii_in
|
3270 |
|
|
Specifies that the input file specified is ASCII. This is the default
|
3271 |
|
|
behaviour.
|
3272 |
|
|
|
3273 |
|
|
@item -A
|
3274 |
|
|
@itemx --ascii_out
|
3275 |
|
|
Specifies that messages in the output @code{bin} files should be in ASCII
|
3276 |
|
|
format.
|
3277 |
|
|
|
3278 |
|
|
@item -b
|
3279 |
|
|
@itemx --binprefix
|
3280 |
|
|
Specifies that @code{bin} filenames should have to be prefixed by the
|
3281 |
|
|
basename of the source file.
|
3282 |
|
|
|
3283 |
|
|
@item -c
|
3284 |
|
|
@itemx --customflag
|
3285 |
|
|
Sets the customer bit in all message id's.
|
3286 |
|
|
|
3287 |
|
|
@item -C @var{codepage}
|
3288 |
|
|
@itemx --codepage_in @var{codepage}
|
3289 |
|
|
Sets the default codepage to be used to convert input file to UTF16. The
|
3290 |
|
|
default is ocdepage 1252.
|
3291 |
|
|
|
3292 |
|
|
@item -d
|
3293 |
|
|
@itemx --decimal_values
|
3294 |
|
|
Outputs the constants in the header file in decimal. Default is using
|
3295 |
|
|
hexadecimal output.
|
3296 |
|
|
|
3297 |
|
|
@item -e @var{ext}
|
3298 |
|
|
@itemx --extension @var{ext}
|
3299 |
|
|
The extension for the header file. The default is .h extension.
|
3300 |
|
|
|
3301 |
|
|
@item -F @var{target}
|
3302 |
|
|
@itemx --target @var{target}
|
3303 |
|
|
Specify the BFD format to use for a bin file as output. This
|
3304 |
|
|
is a BFD target name; you can use the @option{--help} option to see a list
|
3305 |
|
|
of supported targets. Normally @command{windmc} will use the default
|
3306 |
|
|
format, which is the first one listed by the @option{--help} option.
|
3307 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
3308 |
|
|
@ref{Target Selection}.
|
3309 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
3310 |
|
|
|
3311 |
|
|
@item -h @var{path}
|
3312 |
|
|
@itemx --headerdir @var{path}
|
3313 |
|
|
The target directory of the generated header file. The default is the
|
3314 |
|
|
current directory.
|
3315 |
|
|
|
3316 |
|
|
@item -H
|
3317 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
3318 |
|
|
Displays a list of command line options and then exits.
|
3319 |
|
|
|
3320 |
|
|
@item -m @var{characters}
|
3321 |
|
|
@itemx --maxlength @var{characters}
|
3322 |
|
|
Instructs @command{windmc} to generate a warning if the length
|
3323 |
|
|
of any message exceeds the number specified.
|
3324 |
|
|
|
3325 |
|
|
@item -n
|
3326 |
|
|
@itemx --nullterminate
|
3327 |
|
|
Terminate message text in @code{bin} files by zero. By default they are
|
3328 |
|
|
terminated by CR/LF.
|
3329 |
|
|
|
3330 |
|
|
@item -o
|
3331 |
|
|
@itemx --hresult_use
|
3332 |
|
|
Not yet implemented. Instructs @code{windmc} to generate an OLE2 header
|
3333 |
|
|
file, using HRESULT definitions. Status codes are used if the flag is not
|
3334 |
|
|
specified.
|
3335 |
|
|
|
3336 |
|
|
@item -O @var{codepage}
|
3337 |
|
|
@itemx --codepage_out @var{codepage}
|
3338 |
|
|
Sets the default codepage to be used to output text files. The default
|
3339 |
|
|
is ocdepage 1252.
|
3340 |
|
|
|
3341 |
|
|
@item -r @var{path}
|
3342 |
|
|
@itemx --rcdir @var{path}
|
3343 |
|
|
The target directory for the generated @code{rc} script and the generated
|
3344 |
|
|
@code{bin} files that the resource compiler script includes. The default
|
3345 |
|
|
is the current directory.
|
3346 |
|
|
|
3347 |
|
|
@item -u
|
3348 |
|
|
@itemx --unicode_in
|
3349 |
|
|
Specifies that the input file is UTF16.
|
3350 |
|
|
|
3351 |
|
|
@item -U
|
3352 |
|
|
@itemx --unicode_out
|
3353 |
|
|
Specifies that messages in the output @code{bin} file should be in UTF16
|
3354 |
|
|
format. This is the default behaviour.
|
3355 |
|
|
|
3356 |
|
|
@item -v
|
3357 |
|
|
@item --verbose
|
3358 |
|
|
Enable verbose mode.
|
3359 |
|
|
|
3360 |
|
|
@item -V
|
3361 |
|
|
@item --version
|
3362 |
|
|
Prints the version number for @command{windmc}.
|
3363 |
|
|
|
3364 |
|
|
@item -x @var{path}
|
3365 |
|
|
@itemx --xdgb @var{path}
|
3366 |
|
|
The path of the @code{dbg} C include file that maps message id's to the
|
3367 |
|
|
symbolic name. No such file is generated without specifying the switch.
|
3368 |
|
|
@end table
|
3369 |
|
|
|
3370 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3371 |
|
|
|
3372 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3373 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO windmc
|
3374 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
3375 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3376 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3377 |
|
|
|
3378 |
|
|
@node windres
|
3379 |
|
|
@chapter windres
|
3380 |
|
|
|
3381 |
|
|
@command{windres} may be used to manipulate Windows resources.
|
3382 |
|
|
|
3383 |
|
|
@quotation
|
3384 |
|
|
@emph{Warning:} @command{windres} is not always built as part of the binary
|
3385 |
|
|
utilities, since it is only useful for Windows targets.
|
3386 |
|
|
@end quotation
|
3387 |
|
|
|
3388 |
|
|
@c man title windres manipulate Windows resources.
|
3389 |
|
|
|
3390 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3391 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS windres
|
3392 |
|
|
windres [options] [input-file] [output-file]
|
3393 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3394 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3395 |
|
|
|
3396 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION windres
|
3397 |
|
|
|
3398 |
|
|
@command{windres} reads resources from an input file and copies them into
|
3399 |
|
|
an output file. Either file may be in one of three formats:
|
3400 |
|
|
|
3401 |
|
|
@table @code
|
3402 |
|
|
@item rc
|
3403 |
|
|
A text format read by the Resource Compiler.
|
3404 |
|
|
|
3405 |
|
|
@item res
|
3406 |
|
|
A binary format generated by the Resource Compiler.
|
3407 |
|
|
|
3408 |
|
|
@item coff
|
3409 |
|
|
A COFF object or executable.
|
3410 |
|
|
@end table
|
3411 |
|
|
|
3412 |
|
|
The exact description of these different formats is available in
|
3413 |
|
|
documentation from Microsoft.
|
3414 |
|
|
|
3415 |
|
|
When @command{windres} converts from the @code{rc} format to the @code{res}
|
3416 |
|
|
format, it is acting like the Windows Resource Compiler. When
|
3417 |
|
|
@command{windres} converts from the @code{res} format to the @code{coff}
|
3418 |
|
|
format, it is acting like the Windows @code{CVTRES} program.
|
3419 |
|
|
|
3420 |
|
|
When @command{windres} generates an @code{rc} file, the output is similar
|
3421 |
|
|
but not identical to the format expected for the input. When an input
|
3422 |
|
|
@code{rc} file refers to an external filename, an output @code{rc} file
|
3423 |
|
|
will instead include the file contents.
|
3424 |
|
|
|
3425 |
|
|
If the input or output format is not specified, @command{windres} will
|
3426 |
|
|
guess based on the file name, or, for the input file, the file contents.
|
3427 |
|
|
A file with an extension of @file{.rc} will be treated as an @code{rc}
|
3428 |
|
|
file, a file with an extension of @file{.res} will be treated as a
|
3429 |
|
|
@code{res} file, and a file with an extension of @file{.o} or
|
3430 |
|
|
@file{.exe} will be treated as a @code{coff} file.
|
3431 |
|
|
|
3432 |
|
|
If no output file is specified, @command{windres} will print the resources
|
3433 |
|
|
in @code{rc} format to standard output.
|
3434 |
|
|
|
3435 |
|
|
The normal use is for you to write an @code{rc} file, use @command{windres}
|
3436 |
|
|
to convert it to a COFF object file, and then link the COFF file into
|
3437 |
|
|
your application. This will make the resources described in the
|
3438 |
|
|
@code{rc} file available to Windows.
|
3439 |
|
|
|
3440 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3441 |
|
|
|
3442 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS windres
|
3443 |
|
|
|
3444 |
|
|
@table @env
|
3445 |
|
|
@item -i @var{filename}
|
3446 |
|
|
@itemx --input @var{filename}
|
3447 |
|
|
The name of the input file. If this option is not used, then
|
3448 |
|
|
@command{windres} will use the first non-option argument as the input file
|
3449 |
|
|
name. If there are no non-option arguments, then @command{windres} will
|
3450 |
|
|
read from standard input. @command{windres} can not read a COFF file from
|
3451 |
|
|
standard input.
|
3452 |
|
|
|
3453 |
|
|
@item -o @var{filename}
|
3454 |
|
|
@itemx --output @var{filename}
|
3455 |
|
|
The name of the output file. If this option is not used, then
|
3456 |
|
|
@command{windres} will use the first non-option argument, after any used
|
3457 |
|
|
for the input file name, as the output file name. If there is no
|
3458 |
|
|
non-option argument, then @command{windres} will write to standard output.
|
3459 |
|
|
@command{windres} can not write a COFF file to standard output. Note,
|
3460 |
|
|
for compatibility with @command{rc} the option @option{-fo} is also
|
3461 |
|
|
accepted, but its use is not recommended.
|
3462 |
|
|
|
3463 |
|
|
@item -J @var{format}
|
3464 |
|
|
@itemx --input-format @var{format}
|
3465 |
|
|
The input format to read. @var{format} may be @samp{res}, @samp{rc}, or
|
3466 |
|
|
@samp{coff}. If no input format is specified, @command{windres} will
|
3467 |
|
|
guess, as described above.
|
3468 |
|
|
|
3469 |
|
|
@item -O @var{format}
|
3470 |
|
|
@itemx --output-format @var{format}
|
3471 |
|
|
The output format to generate. @var{format} may be @samp{res},
|
3472 |
|
|
@samp{rc}, or @samp{coff}. If no output format is specified,
|
3473 |
|
|
@command{windres} will guess, as described above.
|
3474 |
|
|
|
3475 |
|
|
@item -F @var{target}
|
3476 |
|
|
@itemx --target @var{target}
|
3477 |
|
|
Specify the BFD format to use for a COFF file as input or output. This
|
3478 |
|
|
is a BFD target name; you can use the @option{--help} option to see a list
|
3479 |
|
|
of supported targets. Normally @command{windres} will use the default
|
3480 |
|
|
format, which is the first one listed by the @option{--help} option.
|
3481 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
3482 |
|
|
@ref{Target Selection}.
|
3483 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
3484 |
|
|
|
3485 |
|
|
@item --preprocessor @var{program}
|
3486 |
|
|
When @command{windres} reads an @code{rc} file, it runs it through the C
|
3487 |
|
|
preprocessor first. This option may be used to specify the preprocessor
|
3488 |
|
|
to use, including any leading arguments. The default preprocessor
|
3489 |
|
|
argument is @code{gcc -E -xc-header -DRC_INVOKED}.
|
3490 |
|
|
|
3491 |
|
|
@item --preprocessor-arg @var{option}
|
3492 |
|
|
When @command{windres} reads an @code{rc} file, it runs it through
|
3493 |
|
|
the C preprocessor first. This option may be used to specify additional
|
3494 |
|
|
text to be passed to preprocessor on its command line.
|
3495 |
|
|
This option can be used multiple times to add multiple options to the
|
3496 |
|
|
preprocessor command line.
|
3497 |
|
|
|
3498 |
|
|
@item -I @var{directory}
|
3499 |
|
|
@itemx --include-dir @var{directory}
|
3500 |
|
|
Specify an include directory to use when reading an @code{rc} file.
|
3501 |
|
|
@command{windres} will pass this to the preprocessor as an @option{-I}
|
3502 |
|
|
option. @command{windres} will also search this directory when looking for
|
3503 |
|
|
files named in the @code{rc} file. If the argument passed to this command
|
3504 |
|
|
matches any of the supported @var{formats} (as described in the @option{-J}
|
3505 |
|
|
option), it will issue a deprecation warning, and behave just like the
|
3506 |
|
|
@option{-J} option. New programs should not use this behaviour. If a
|
3507 |
|
|
directory happens to match a @var{format}, simple prefix it with @samp{./}
|
3508 |
|
|
to disable the backward compatibility.
|
3509 |
|
|
|
3510 |
|
|
@item -D @var{target}
|
3511 |
|
|
@itemx --define @var{sym}[=@var{val}]
|
3512 |
|
|
Specify a @option{-D} option to pass to the preprocessor when reading an
|
3513 |
|
|
@code{rc} file.
|
3514 |
|
|
|
3515 |
|
|
@item -U @var{target}
|
3516 |
|
|
@itemx --undefine @var{sym}
|
3517 |
|
|
Specify a @option{-U} option to pass to the preprocessor when reading an
|
3518 |
|
|
@code{rc} file.
|
3519 |
|
|
|
3520 |
|
|
@item -r
|
3521 |
|
|
Ignored for compatibility with rc.
|
3522 |
|
|
|
3523 |
|
|
@item -v
|
3524 |
|
|
Enable verbose mode. This tells you what the preprocessor is if you
|
3525 |
|
|
didn't specify one.
|
3526 |
|
|
|
3527 |
|
|
@item -c @var{val}
|
3528 |
|
|
@item --codepage @var{val}
|
3529 |
|
|
Specify the default codepage to use when reading an @code{rc} file.
|
3530 |
|
|
@var{val} should be a hexadecimal prefixed by @samp{0x} or decimal
|
3531 |
|
|
codepage code. The valid range is from zero up to 0xffff, but the
|
3532 |
|
|
validity of the codepage is host and configuration dependent.
|
3533 |
|
|
|
3534 |
|
|
@item -l @var{val}
|
3535 |
|
|
@item --language @var{val}
|
3536 |
|
|
Specify the default language to use when reading an @code{rc} file.
|
3537 |
|
|
@var{val} should be a hexadecimal language code. The low eight bits are
|
3538 |
|
|
the language, and the high eight bits are the sublanguage.
|
3539 |
|
|
|
3540 |
|
|
@item --use-temp-file
|
3541 |
|
|
Use a temporary file to instead of using popen to read the output of
|
3542 |
|
|
the preprocessor. Use this option if the popen implementation is buggy
|
3543 |
|
|
on the host (eg., certain non-English language versions of Windows 95 and
|
3544 |
|
|
Windows 98 are known to have buggy popen where the output will instead
|
3545 |
|
|
go the console).
|
3546 |
|
|
|
3547 |
|
|
@item --no-use-temp-file
|
3548 |
|
|
Use popen, not a temporary file, to read the output of the preprocessor.
|
3549 |
|
|
This is the default behaviour.
|
3550 |
|
|
|
3551 |
|
|
@item -h
|
3552 |
|
|
@item --help
|
3553 |
|
|
Prints a usage summary.
|
3554 |
|
|
|
3555 |
|
|
@item -V
|
3556 |
|
|
@item --version
|
3557 |
|
|
Prints the version number for @command{windres}.
|
3558 |
|
|
|
3559 |
|
|
@item --yydebug
|
3560 |
|
|
If @command{windres} is compiled with @code{YYDEBUG} defined as @code{1},
|
3561 |
|
|
this will turn on parser debugging.
|
3562 |
|
|
@end table
|
3563 |
|
|
|
3564 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3565 |
|
|
|
3566 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3567 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO windres
|
3568 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
3569 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3570 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3571 |
|
|
|
3572 |
|
|
@node dlltool
|
3573 |
|
|
@chapter dlltool
|
3574 |
|
|
@cindex DLL
|
3575 |
|
|
@kindex dlltool
|
3576 |
|
|
|
3577 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} is used to create the files needed to create dynamic
|
3578 |
|
|
link libraries (DLLs) on systems which understand PE format image
|
3579 |
|
|
files such as Windows. A DLL contains an export table which contains
|
3580 |
|
|
information that the runtime loader needs to resolve references from a
|
3581 |
|
|
referencing program.
|
3582 |
|
|
|
3583 |
|
|
The export table is generated by this program by reading in a
|
3584 |
|
|
@file{.def} file or scanning the @file{.a} and @file{.o} files which
|
3585 |
|
|
will be in the DLL. A @file{.o} file can contain information in
|
3586 |
|
|
special @samp{.drectve} sections with export information.
|
3587 |
|
|
|
3588 |
|
|
@quotation
|
3589 |
|
|
@emph{Note:} @command{dlltool} is not always built as part of the
|
3590 |
|
|
binary utilities, since it is only useful for those targets which
|
3591 |
|
|
support DLLs.
|
3592 |
|
|
@end quotation
|
3593 |
|
|
|
3594 |
|
|
@c man title dlltool Create files needed to build and use DLLs.
|
3595 |
|
|
|
3596 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3597 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS dlltool
|
3598 |
|
|
dlltool [@option{-d}|@option{--input-def} @var{def-file-name}]
|
3599 |
|
|
[@option{-b}|@option{--base-file} @var{base-file-name}]
|
3600 |
|
|
[@option{-e}|@option{--output-exp} @var{exports-file-name}]
|
3601 |
|
|
[@option{-z}|@option{--output-def} @var{def-file-name}]
|
3602 |
|
|
[@option{-l}|@option{--output-lib} @var{library-file-name}]
|
3603 |
|
|
[@option{-y}|@option{--output-delaylib} @var{library-file-name}]
|
3604 |
|
|
[@option{--export-all-symbols}] [@option{--no-export-all-symbols}]
|
3605 |
|
|
[@option{--exclude-symbols} @var{list}]
|
3606 |
|
|
[@option{--no-default-excludes}]
|
3607 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{--as} @var{path-to-assembler}] [@option{-f}|@option{--as-flags} @var{options}]
|
3608 |
|
|
[@option{-D}|@option{--dllname} @var{name}] [@option{-m}|@option{--machine} @var{machine}]
|
3609 |
|
|
[@option{-a}|@option{--add-indirect}]
|
3610 |
|
|
[@option{-U}|@option{--add-underscore}] [@option{--add-stdcall-underscore}]
|
3611 |
|
|
[@option{-k}|@option{--kill-at}] [@option{-A}|@option{--add-stdcall-alias}]
|
3612 |
|
|
[@option{-p}|@option{--ext-prefix-alias} @var{prefix}]
|
3613 |
|
|
[@option{-x}|@option{--no-idata4}] [@option{-c}|@option{--no-idata5}]
|
3614 |
|
|
[@option{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables}]
|
3615 |
|
|
[@option{-I}|@option{--identify} @var{library-file-name}] [@option{--identify-strict}]
|
3616 |
|
|
[@option{-i}|@option{--interwork}]
|
3617 |
|
|
[@option{-n}|@option{--nodelete}] [@option{-t}|@option{--temp-prefix} @var{prefix}]
|
3618 |
|
|
[@option{-v}|@option{--verbose}]
|
3619 |
|
|
[@option{-h}|@option{--help}] [@option{-V}|@option{--version}]
|
3620 |
|
|
[@option{--no-leading-underscore}] [@option{--leading-underscore}]
|
3621 |
|
|
[object-file @dots{}]
|
3622 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3623 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3624 |
|
|
|
3625 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION dlltool
|
3626 |
|
|
|
3627 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} reads its inputs, which can come from the @option{-d} and
|
3628 |
|
|
@option{-b} options as well as object files specified on the command
|
3629 |
|
|
line. It then processes these inputs and if the @option{-e} option has
|
3630 |
|
|
been specified it creates a exports file. If the @option{-l} option
|
3631 |
|
|
has been specified it creates a library file and if the @option{-z} option
|
3632 |
|
|
has been specified it creates a def file. Any or all of the @option{-e},
|
3633 |
|
|
@option{-l} and @option{-z} options can be present in one invocation of
|
3634 |
|
|
dlltool.
|
3635 |
|
|
|
3636 |
|
|
When creating a DLL, along with the source for the DLL, it is necessary
|
3637 |
|
|
to have three other files. @command{dlltool} can help with the creation of
|
3638 |
|
|
these files.
|
3639 |
|
|
|
3640 |
|
|
The first file is a @file{.def} file which specifies which functions are
|
3641 |
|
|
exported from the DLL, which functions the DLL imports, and so on. This
|
3642 |
|
|
is a text file and can be created by hand, or @command{dlltool} can be used
|
3643 |
|
|
to create it using the @option{-z} option. In this case @command{dlltool}
|
3644 |
|
|
will scan the object files specified on its command line looking for
|
3645 |
|
|
those functions which have been specially marked as being exported and
|
3646 |
|
|
put entries for them in the @file{.def} file it creates.
|
3647 |
|
|
|
3648 |
|
|
In order to mark a function as being exported from a DLL, it needs to
|
3649 |
|
|
have an @option{-export:<name_of_function>} entry in the @samp{.drectve}
|
3650 |
|
|
section of the object file. This can be done in C by using the
|
3651 |
|
|
asm() operator:
|
3652 |
|
|
|
3653 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3654 |
|
|
asm (".section .drectve");
|
3655 |
|
|
asm (".ascii \"-export:my_func\"");
|
3656 |
|
|
|
3657 |
|
|
int my_func (void) @{ @dots{} @}
|
3658 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3659 |
|
|
|
3660 |
|
|
The second file needed for DLL creation is an exports file. This file
|
3661 |
|
|
is linked with the object files that make up the body of the DLL and it
|
3662 |
|
|
handles the interface between the DLL and the outside world. This is a
|
3663 |
|
|
binary file and it can be created by giving the @option{-e} option to
|
3664 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} when it is creating or reading in a @file{.def} file.
|
3665 |
|
|
|
3666 |
|
|
The third file needed for DLL creation is the library file that programs
|
3667 |
|
|
will link with in order to access the functions in the DLL (an `import
|
3668 |
|
|
library'). This file can be created by giving the @option{-l} option to
|
3669 |
|
|
dlltool when it is creating or reading in a @file{.def} file.
|
3670 |
|
|
|
3671 |
|
|
If the @option{-y} option is specified, dlltool generates a delay-import
|
3672 |
|
|
library that can be used instead of the normal import library to allow
|
3673 |
|
|
a program to link to the dll only as soon as an imported function is
|
3674 |
|
|
called for the first time. The resulting executable will need to be
|
3675 |
|
|
linked to the static delayimp library containing __delayLoadHelper2(),
|
3676 |
|
|
which in turn will import LoadLibraryA and GetProcAddress from kernel32.
|
3677 |
|
|
|
3678 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} builds the library file by hand, but it builds the
|
3679 |
|
|
exports file by creating temporary files containing assembler statements
|
3680 |
|
|
and then assembling these. The @option{-S} command line option can be
|
3681 |
|
|
used to specify the path to the assembler that dlltool will use,
|
3682 |
|
|
and the @option{-f} option can be used to pass specific flags to that
|
3683 |
|
|
assembler. The @option{-n} can be used to prevent dlltool from deleting
|
3684 |
|
|
these temporary assembler files when it is done, and if @option{-n} is
|
3685 |
|
|
specified twice then this will prevent dlltool from deleting the
|
3686 |
|
|
temporary object files it used to build the library.
|
3687 |
|
|
|
3688 |
|
|
Here is an example of creating a DLL from a source file @samp{dll.c} and
|
3689 |
|
|
also creating a program (from an object file called @samp{program.o})
|
3690 |
|
|
that uses that DLL:
|
3691 |
|
|
|
3692 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3693 |
|
|
gcc -c dll.c
|
3694 |
|
|
dlltool -e exports.o -l dll.lib dll.o
|
3695 |
|
|
gcc dll.o exports.o -o dll.dll
|
3696 |
|
|
gcc program.o dll.lib -o program
|
3697 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3698 |
|
|
|
3699 |
|
|
|
3700 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} may also be used to query an existing import library
|
3701 |
|
|
to determine the name of the DLL to which it is associated. See the
|
3702 |
|
|
description of the @option{-I} or @option{--identify} option.
|
3703 |
|
|
|
3704 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3705 |
|
|
|
3706 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS dlltool
|
3707 |
|
|
|
3708 |
|
|
The command line options have the following meanings:
|
3709 |
|
|
|
3710 |
|
|
@table @env
|
3711 |
|
|
|
3712 |
|
|
@item -d @var{filename}
|
3713 |
|
|
@itemx --input-def @var{filename}
|
3714 |
|
|
@cindex input .def file
|
3715 |
|
|
Specifies the name of a @file{.def} file to be read in and processed.
|
3716 |
|
|
|
3717 |
|
|
@item -b @var{filename}
|
3718 |
|
|
@itemx --base-file @var{filename}
|
3719 |
|
|
@cindex base files
|
3720 |
|
|
Specifies the name of a base file to be read in and processed. The
|
3721 |
|
|
contents of this file will be added to the relocation section in the
|
3722 |
|
|
exports file generated by dlltool.
|
3723 |
|
|
|
3724 |
|
|
@item -e @var{filename}
|
3725 |
|
|
@itemx --output-exp @var{filename}
|
3726 |
|
|
Specifies the name of the export file to be created by dlltool.
|
3727 |
|
|
|
3728 |
|
|
@item -z @var{filename}
|
3729 |
|
|
@itemx --output-def @var{filename}
|
3730 |
|
|
Specifies the name of the @file{.def} file to be created by dlltool.
|
3731 |
|
|
|
3732 |
|
|
@item -l @var{filename}
|
3733 |
|
|
@itemx --output-lib @var{filename}
|
3734 |
|
|
Specifies the name of the library file to be created by dlltool.
|
3735 |
|
|
|
3736 |
|
|
@item -y @var{filename}
|
3737 |
|
|
@itemx --output-delaylib @var{filename}
|
3738 |
|
|
Specifies the name of the delay-import library file to be created by dlltool.
|
3739 |
|
|
|
3740 |
|
|
@item --export-all-symbols
|
3741 |
|
|
Treat all global and weak defined symbols found in the input object
|
3742 |
|
|
files as symbols to be exported. There is a small list of symbols which
|
3743 |
|
|
are not exported by default; see the @option{--no-default-excludes}
|
3744 |
|
|
option. You may add to the list of symbols to not export by using the
|
3745 |
|
|
@option{--exclude-symbols} option.
|
3746 |
|
|
|
3747 |
|
|
@item --no-export-all-symbols
|
3748 |
|
|
Only export symbols explicitly listed in an input @file{.def} file or in
|
3749 |
|
|
@samp{.drectve} sections in the input object files. This is the default
|
3750 |
|
|
behaviour. The @samp{.drectve} sections are created by @samp{dllexport}
|
3751 |
|
|
attributes in the source code.
|
3752 |
|
|
|
3753 |
|
|
@item --exclude-symbols @var{list}
|
3754 |
|
|
Do not export the symbols in @var{list}. This is a list of symbol names
|
3755 |
|
|
separated by comma or colon characters. The symbol names should not
|
3756 |
|
|
contain a leading underscore. This is only meaningful when
|
3757 |
|
|
@option{--export-all-symbols} is used.
|
3758 |
|
|
|
3759 |
|
|
@item --no-default-excludes
|
3760 |
|
|
When @option{--export-all-symbols} is used, it will by default avoid
|
3761 |
|
|
exporting certain special symbols. The current list of symbols to avoid
|
3762 |
|
|
exporting is @samp{DllMain@@12}, @samp{DllEntryPoint@@0},
|
3763 |
|
|
@samp{impure_ptr}. You may use the @option{--no-default-excludes} option
|
3764 |
|
|
to go ahead and export these special symbols. This is only meaningful
|
3765 |
|
|
when @option{--export-all-symbols} is used.
|
3766 |
|
|
|
3767 |
|
|
@item -S @var{path}
|
3768 |
|
|
@itemx --as @var{path}
|
3769 |
|
|
Specifies the path, including the filename, of the assembler to be used
|
3770 |
|
|
to create the exports file.
|
3771 |
|
|
|
3772 |
|
|
@item -f @var{options}
|
3773 |
|
|
@itemx --as-flags @var{options}
|
3774 |
|
|
Specifies any specific command line options to be passed to the
|
3775 |
|
|
assembler when building the exports file. This option will work even if
|
3776 |
|
|
the @option{-S} option is not used. This option only takes one argument,
|
3777 |
|
|
and if it occurs more than once on the command line, then later
|
3778 |
|
|
occurrences will override earlier occurrences. So if it is necessary to
|
3779 |
|
|
pass multiple options to the assembler they should be enclosed in
|
3780 |
|
|
double quotes.
|
3781 |
|
|
|
3782 |
|
|
@item -D @var{name}
|
3783 |
|
|
@itemx --dll-name @var{name}
|
3784 |
|
|
Specifies the name to be stored in the @file{.def} file as the name of
|
3785 |
|
|
the DLL when the @option{-e} option is used. If this option is not
|
3786 |
|
|
present, then the filename given to the @option{-e} option will be
|
3787 |
|
|
used as the name of the DLL.
|
3788 |
|
|
|
3789 |
|
|
@item -m @var{machine}
|
3790 |
|
|
@itemx -machine @var{machine}
|
3791 |
|
|
Specifies the type of machine for which the library file should be
|
3792 |
|
|
built. @command{dlltool} has a built in default type, depending upon how
|
3793 |
|
|
it was created, but this option can be used to override that. This is
|
3794 |
|
|
normally only useful when creating DLLs for an ARM processor, when the
|
3795 |
|
|
contents of the DLL are actually encode using Thumb instructions.
|
3796 |
|
|
|
3797 |
|
|
@item -a
|
3798 |
|
|
@itemx --add-indirect
|
3799 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports file it
|
3800 |
|
|
should add a section which allows the exported functions to be
|
3801 |
|
|
referenced without using the import library. Whatever the hell that
|
3802 |
|
|
means!
|
3803 |
|
|
|
3804 |
|
|
@item -U
|
3805 |
|
|
@itemx --add-underscore
|
3806 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports file it
|
3807 |
|
|
should prepend an underscore to the names of @emph{all} exported symbols.
|
3808 |
|
|
|
3809 |
|
|
@item --no-leading-underscore
|
3810 |
|
|
@item --leading-underscore
|
3811 |
|
|
Specifies whether standard symbol should be forced to be prefixed, or
|
3812 |
|
|
not.
|
3813 |
|
|
|
3814 |
|
|
@item --add-stdcall-underscore
|
3815 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports file it
|
3816 |
|
|
should prepend an underscore to the names of exported @emph{stdcall}
|
3817 |
|
|
functions. Variable names and non-stdcall function names are not modified.
|
3818 |
|
|
This option is useful when creating GNU-compatible import libs for third
|
3819 |
|
|
party DLLs that were built with MS-Windows tools.
|
3820 |
|
|
|
3821 |
|
|
@item -k
|
3822 |
|
|
@itemx --kill-at
|
3823 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports file it
|
3824 |
|
|
should not append the string @samp{@@ <number>}. These numbers are
|
3825 |
|
|
called ordinal numbers and they represent another way of accessing the
|
3826 |
|
|
function in a DLL, other than by name.
|
3827 |
|
|
|
3828 |
|
|
@item -A
|
3829 |
|
|
@itemx --add-stdcall-alias
|
3830 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports file it
|
3831 |
|
|
should add aliases for stdcall symbols without @samp{@@ <number>}
|
3832 |
|
|
in addition to the symbols with @samp{@@ <number>}.
|
3833 |
|
|
|
3834 |
|
|
@item -p
|
3835 |
|
|
@itemx --ext-prefix-alias @var{prefix}
|
3836 |
|
|
Causes @command{dlltool} to create external aliases for all DLL
|
3837 |
|
|
imports with the specified prefix. The aliases are created for both
|
3838 |
|
|
external and import symbols with no leading underscore.
|
3839 |
|
|
|
3840 |
|
|
@item -x
|
3841 |
|
|
@itemx --no-idata4
|
3842 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports and library
|
3843 |
|
|
files it should omit the @code{.idata4} section. This is for compatibility
|
3844 |
|
|
with certain operating systems.
|
3845 |
|
|
|
3846 |
|
|
@item --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
|
3847 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports and library
|
3848 |
|
|
files it should prefix the @code{.idata4} and @code{.idata5} by zero an
|
3849 |
|
|
element. This emulates old gnu import library generation of
|
3850 |
|
|
@code{dlltool}. By default this option is turned off.
|
3851 |
|
|
|
3852 |
|
|
@item -c
|
3853 |
|
|
@itemx --no-idata5
|
3854 |
|
|
Specifies that when @command{dlltool} is creating the exports and library
|
3855 |
|
|
files it should omit the @code{.idata5} section. This is for compatibility
|
3856 |
|
|
with certain operating systems.
|
3857 |
|
|
|
3858 |
|
|
@item -I @var{filename}
|
3859 |
|
|
@itemx --identify @var{filename}
|
3860 |
|
|
Specifies that @command{dlltool} should inspect the import library
|
3861 |
|
|
indicated by @var{filename} and report, on @code{stdout}, the name(s)
|
3862 |
|
|
of the associated DLL(s). This can be performed in addition to any
|
3863 |
|
|
other operations indicated by the other options and arguments.
|
3864 |
|
|
@command{dlltool} fails if the import library does not exist or is not
|
3865 |
|
|
actually an import library. See also @option{--identify-strict}.
|
3866 |
|
|
|
3867 |
|
|
@item --identify-strict
|
3868 |
|
|
Modifies the behavior of the @option{--identify} option, such
|
3869 |
|
|
that an error is reported if @var{filename} is associated with
|
3870 |
|
|
more than one DLL.
|
3871 |
|
|
|
3872 |
|
|
@item -i
|
3873 |
|
|
@itemx --interwork
|
3874 |
|
|
Specifies that @command{dlltool} should mark the objects in the library
|
3875 |
|
|
file and exports file that it produces as supporting interworking
|
3876 |
|
|
between ARM and Thumb code.
|
3877 |
|
|
|
3878 |
|
|
@item -n
|
3879 |
|
|
@itemx --nodelete
|
3880 |
|
|
Makes @command{dlltool} preserve the temporary assembler files it used to
|
3881 |
|
|
create the exports file. If this option is repeated then dlltool will
|
3882 |
|
|
also preserve the temporary object files it uses to create the library
|
3883 |
|
|
file.
|
3884 |
|
|
|
3885 |
|
|
@item -t @var{prefix}
|
3886 |
|
|
@itemx --temp-prefix @var{prefix}
|
3887 |
|
|
Makes @command{dlltool} use @var{prefix} when constructing the names of
|
3888 |
|
|
temporary assembler and object files. By default, the temp file prefix
|
3889 |
|
|
is generated from the pid.
|
3890 |
|
|
|
3891 |
|
|
@item -v
|
3892 |
|
|
@itemx --verbose
|
3893 |
|
|
Make dlltool describe what it is doing.
|
3894 |
|
|
|
3895 |
|
|
@item -h
|
3896 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
3897 |
|
|
Displays a list of command line options and then exits.
|
3898 |
|
|
|
3899 |
|
|
@item -V
|
3900 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
3901 |
|
|
Displays dlltool's version number and then exits.
|
3902 |
|
|
|
3903 |
|
|
@end table
|
3904 |
|
|
|
3905 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3906 |
|
|
|
3907 |
|
|
@menu
|
3908 |
|
|
* def file format:: The format of the dlltool @file{.def} file
|
3909 |
|
|
@end menu
|
3910 |
|
|
|
3911 |
|
|
@node def file format
|
3912 |
|
|
@section The format of the @command{dlltool} @file{.def} file
|
3913 |
|
|
|
3914 |
|
|
A @file{.def} file contains any number of the following commands:
|
3915 |
|
|
|
3916 |
|
|
@table @asis
|
3917 |
|
|
|
3918 |
|
|
@item @code{NAME} @var{name} @code{[ ,} @var{base} @code{]}
|
3919 |
|
|
The result is going to be named @var{name}@code{.exe}.
|
3920 |
|
|
|
3921 |
|
|
@item @code{LIBRARY} @var{name} @code{[ ,} @var{base} @code{]}
|
3922 |
|
|
The result is going to be named @var{name}@code{.dll}.
|
3923 |
|
|
|
3924 |
|
|
@item @code{EXPORTS ( ( (} @var{name1} @code{[ = } @var{name2} @code{] ) | ( } @var{name1} @code{=} @var{module-name} @code{.} @var{external-name} @code{) ) [ == } @var{its_name} @code{]}
|
3925 |
|
|
@item @code{[} @var{integer} @code{] [ NONAME ] [ CONSTANT ] [ DATA ] [ PRIVATE ] ) *}
|
3926 |
|
|
Declares @var{name1} as an exported symbol from the DLL, with optional
|
3927 |
|
|
ordinal number @var{integer}, or declares @var{name1} as an alias
|
3928 |
|
|
(forward) of the function @var{external-name} in the DLL.
|
3929 |
|
|
If @var{its_name} is specified, this name is used as string in export table.
|
3930 |
|
|
@var{module-name}.
|
3931 |
|
|
|
3932 |
|
|
@item @code{IMPORTS ( (} @var{internal-name} @code{=} @var{module-name} @code{.} @var{integer} @code{) | [} @var{internal-name} @code{= ]} @var{module-name} @code{.} @var{external-name} @code{) [ == ) @var{its_name} @code{]} *}
|
3933 |
|
|
Declares that @var{external-name} or the exported function whose
|
3934 |
|
|
ordinal number is @var{integer} is to be imported from the file
|
3935 |
|
|
@var{module-name}. If @var{internal-name} is specified then this is
|
3936 |
|
|
the name that the imported function will be referred to in the body of
|
3937 |
|
|
the DLL.
|
3938 |
|
|
If @var{its_name} is specified, this name is used as string in import table.
|
3939 |
|
|
|
3940 |
|
|
@item @code{DESCRIPTION} @var{string}
|
3941 |
|
|
Puts @var{string} into the output @file{.exp} file in the
|
3942 |
|
|
@code{.rdata} section.
|
3943 |
|
|
|
3944 |
|
|
@item @code{STACKSIZE} @var{number-reserve} @code{[, } @var{number-commit} @code{]}
|
3945 |
|
|
@item @code{HEAPSIZE} @var{number-reserve} @code{[, } @var{number-commit} @code{]}
|
3946 |
|
|
Generates @code{--stack} or @code{--heap}
|
3947 |
|
|
@var{number-reserve},@var{number-commit} in the output @code{.drectve}
|
3948 |
|
|
section. The linker will see this and act upon it.
|
3949 |
|
|
|
3950 |
|
|
@item @code{CODE} @var{attr} @code{+}
|
3951 |
|
|
@item @code{DATA} @var{attr} @code{+}
|
3952 |
|
|
@item @code{SECTIONS (} @var{section-name} @var{attr}@code{ + ) *}
|
3953 |
|
|
Generates @code{--attr} @var{section-name} @var{attr} in the output
|
3954 |
|
|
@code{.drectve} section, where @var{attr} is one of @code{READ},
|
3955 |
|
|
@code{WRITE}, @code{EXECUTE} or @code{SHARED}. The linker will see
|
3956 |
|
|
this and act upon it.
|
3957 |
|
|
|
3958 |
|
|
@end table
|
3959 |
|
|
|
3960 |
|
|
@ignore
|
3961 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO dlltool
|
3962 |
|
|
The Info pages for @file{binutils}.
|
3963 |
|
|
@c man end
|
3964 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
3965 |
|
|
|
3966 |
|
|
@node readelf
|
3967 |
|
|
@chapter readelf
|
3968 |
|
|
|
3969 |
|
|
@cindex ELF file information
|
3970 |
|
|
@kindex readelf
|
3971 |
|
|
|
3972 |
|
|
@c man title readelf Displays information about ELF files.
|
3973 |
|
|
|
3974 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3975 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS readelf
|
3976 |
|
|
readelf [@option{-a}|@option{--all}]
|
3977 |
|
|
[@option{-h}|@option{--file-header}]
|
3978 |
|
|
[@option{-l}|@option{--program-headers}|@option{--segments}]
|
3979 |
|
|
[@option{-S}|@option{--section-headers}|@option{--sections}]
|
3980 |
|
|
[@option{-g}|@option{--section-groups}]
|
3981 |
|
|
[@option{-t}|@option{--section-details}]
|
3982 |
|
|
[@option{-e}|@option{--headers}]
|
3983 |
|
|
[@option{-s}|@option{--syms}|@option{--symbols}]
|
3984 |
|
|
[@option{--dyn-syms}]
|
3985 |
|
|
[@option{-n}|@option{--notes}]
|
3986 |
|
|
[@option{-r}|@option{--relocs}]
|
3987 |
|
|
[@option{-u}|@option{--unwind}]
|
3988 |
|
|
[@option{-d}|@option{--dynamic}]
|
3989 |
|
|
[@option{-V}|@option{--version-info}]
|
3990 |
|
|
[@option{-A}|@option{--arch-specific}]
|
3991 |
|
|
[@option{-D}|@option{--use-dynamic}]
|
3992 |
|
|
[@option{-x} <number or name>|@option{--hex-dump=}<number or name>]
|
3993 |
|
|
[@option{-p} <number or name>|@option{--string-dump=}<number or name>]
|
3994 |
|
|
[@option{-R} <number or name>|@option{--relocated-dump=}<number or name>]
|
3995 |
|
|
[@option{-c}|@option{--archive-index}]
|
3996 |
|
|
[@option{-w[lLiaprmfFsoRt]}|
|
3997 |
|
|
@option{--debug-dump}[=rawline,=decodedline,=info,=abbrev,=pubnames,=aranges,=macro,=frames,=frames-interp,=str,=loc,=Ranges,=pubtypes,=trace_info,=trace_abbrev,=trace_aranges,=gdb_index]]
|
3998 |
|
|
[@option{--dwarf-depth=@var{n}}]
|
3999 |
|
|
[@option{--dwarf-start=@var{n}}]
|
4000 |
|
|
[@option{-I}|@option{--histogram}]
|
4001 |
|
|
[@option{-v}|@option{--version}]
|
4002 |
|
|
[@option{-W}|@option{--wide}]
|
4003 |
|
|
[@option{-H}|@option{--help}]
|
4004 |
|
|
@var{elffile}@dots{}
|
4005 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4006 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4007 |
|
|
|
4008 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION readelf
|
4009 |
|
|
|
4010 |
|
|
@command{readelf} displays information about one or more ELF format object
|
4011 |
|
|
files. The options control what particular information to display.
|
4012 |
|
|
|
4013 |
|
|
@var{elffile}@dots{} are the object files to be examined. 32-bit and
|
4014 |
|
|
64-bit ELF files are supported, as are archives containing ELF files.
|
4015 |
|
|
|
4016 |
|
|
This program performs a similar function to @command{objdump} but it
|
4017 |
|
|
goes into more detail and it exists independently of the @sc{bfd}
|
4018 |
|
|
library, so if there is a bug in @sc{bfd} then readelf will not be
|
4019 |
|
|
affected.
|
4020 |
|
|
|
4021 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4022 |
|
|
|
4023 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS readelf
|
4024 |
|
|
|
4025 |
|
|
The long and short forms of options, shown here as alternatives, are
|
4026 |
|
|
equivalent. At least one option besides @samp{-v} or @samp{-H} must be
|
4027 |
|
|
given.
|
4028 |
|
|
|
4029 |
|
|
@table @env
|
4030 |
|
|
@item -a
|
4031 |
|
|
@itemx --all
|
4032 |
|
|
Equivalent to specifying @option{--file-header},
|
4033 |
|
|
@option{--program-headers}, @option{--sections}, @option{--symbols},
|
4034 |
|
|
@option{--relocs}, @option{--dynamic}, @option{--notes} and
|
4035 |
|
|
@option{--version-info}.
|
4036 |
|
|
|
4037 |
|
|
@item -h
|
4038 |
|
|
@itemx --file-header
|
4039 |
|
|
@cindex ELF file header information
|
4040 |
|
|
Displays the information contained in the ELF header at the start of the
|
4041 |
|
|
file.
|
4042 |
|
|
|
4043 |
|
|
@item -l
|
4044 |
|
|
@itemx --program-headers
|
4045 |
|
|
@itemx --segments
|
4046 |
|
|
@cindex ELF program header information
|
4047 |
|
|
@cindex ELF segment information
|
4048 |
|
|
Displays the information contained in the file's segment headers, if it
|
4049 |
|
|
has any.
|
4050 |
|
|
|
4051 |
|
|
@item -S
|
4052 |
|
|
@itemx --sections
|
4053 |
|
|
@itemx --section-headers
|
4054 |
|
|
@cindex ELF section information
|
4055 |
|
|
Displays the information contained in the file's section headers, if it
|
4056 |
|
|
has any.
|
4057 |
|
|
|
4058 |
|
|
@item -g
|
4059 |
|
|
@itemx --section-groups
|
4060 |
|
|
@cindex ELF section group information
|
4061 |
|
|
Displays the information contained in the file's section groups, if it
|
4062 |
|
|
has any.
|
4063 |
|
|
|
4064 |
|
|
@item -t
|
4065 |
|
|
@itemx --section-details
|
4066 |
|
|
@cindex ELF section information
|
4067 |
|
|
Displays the detailed section information. Implies @option{-S}.
|
4068 |
|
|
|
4069 |
|
|
@item -s
|
4070 |
|
|
@itemx --symbols
|
4071 |
|
|
@itemx --syms
|
4072 |
|
|
@cindex ELF symbol table information
|
4073 |
|
|
Displays the entries in symbol table section of the file, if it has one.
|
4074 |
|
|
|
4075 |
|
|
@item --dyn-syms
|
4076 |
|
|
@cindex ELF dynamic symbol table information
|
4077 |
|
|
Displays the entries in dynamic symbol table section of the file, if it
|
4078 |
|
|
has one.
|
4079 |
|
|
|
4080 |
|
|
@item -e
|
4081 |
|
|
@itemx --headers
|
4082 |
|
|
Display all the headers in the file. Equivalent to @option{-h -l -S}.
|
4083 |
|
|
|
4084 |
|
|
@item -n
|
4085 |
|
|
@itemx --notes
|
4086 |
|
|
@cindex ELF notes
|
4087 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the NOTE segments and/or sections, if any.
|
4088 |
|
|
|
4089 |
|
|
@item -r
|
4090 |
|
|
@itemx --relocs
|
4091 |
|
|
@cindex ELF reloc information
|
4092 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the file's relocation section, if it has one.
|
4093 |
|
|
|
4094 |
|
|
@item -u
|
4095 |
|
|
@itemx --unwind
|
4096 |
|
|
@cindex unwind information
|
4097 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the file's unwind section, if it has one. Only
|
4098 |
|
|
the unwind sections for IA64 ELF files, as well as ARM unwind tables
|
4099 |
|
|
(@code{.ARM.exidx} / @code{.ARM.extab}) are currently supported.
|
4100 |
|
|
|
4101 |
|
|
@item -d
|
4102 |
|
|
@itemx --dynamic
|
4103 |
|
|
@cindex ELF dynamic section information
|
4104 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the file's dynamic section, if it has one.
|
4105 |
|
|
|
4106 |
|
|
@item -V
|
4107 |
|
|
@itemx --version-info
|
4108 |
|
|
@cindex ELF version sections informations
|
4109 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the version sections in the file, it they
|
4110 |
|
|
exist.
|
4111 |
|
|
|
4112 |
|
|
@item -A
|
4113 |
|
|
@itemx --arch-specific
|
4114 |
|
|
Displays architecture-specific information in the file, if there
|
4115 |
|
|
is any.
|
4116 |
|
|
|
4117 |
|
|
@item -D
|
4118 |
|
|
@itemx --use-dynamic
|
4119 |
|
|
When displaying symbols, this option makes @command{readelf} use the
|
4120 |
|
|
symbol hash tables in the file's dynamic section, rather than the
|
4121 |
|
|
symbol table sections.
|
4122 |
|
|
|
4123 |
|
|
@item -x <number or name>
|
4124 |
|
|
@itemx --hex-dump=<number or name>
|
4125 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the indicated section as a hexadecimal bytes.
|
4126 |
|
|
A number identifies a particular section by index in the section table;
|
4127 |
|
|
any other string identifies all sections with that name in the object file.
|
4128 |
|
|
|
4129 |
|
|
@item -R <number or name>
|
4130 |
|
|
@itemx --relocated-dump=<number or name>
|
4131 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the indicated section as a hexadecimal
|
4132 |
|
|
bytes. A number identifies a particular section by index in the
|
4133 |
|
|
section table; any other string identifies all sections with that name
|
4134 |
|
|
in the object file. The contents of the section will be relocated
|
4135 |
|
|
before they are displayed.
|
4136 |
|
|
|
4137 |
|
|
@item -p <number or name>
|
4138 |
|
|
@itemx --string-dump=<number or name>
|
4139 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the indicated section as printable strings.
|
4140 |
|
|
A number identifies a particular section by index in the section table;
|
4141 |
|
|
any other string identifies all sections with that name in the object file.
|
4142 |
|
|
|
4143 |
|
|
@item -c
|
4144 |
|
|
@itemx --archive-index
|
4145 |
|
|
@cindex Archive file symbol index information
|
4146 |
|
|
Displays the file symbol index infomation contained in the header part
|
4147 |
|
|
of binary archives. Performs the same function as the @option{t}
|
4148 |
|
|
command to @command{ar}, but without using the BFD library. @xref{ar}.
|
4149 |
|
|
|
4150 |
|
|
@item -w[lLiaprmfFsoRt]
|
4151 |
|
|
@itemx --debug-dump[=rawline,=decodedline,=info,=abbrev,=pubnames,=aranges,=macro,=frames,=frames-interp,=str,=loc,=Ranges,=pubtypes,=trace_info,=trace_abbrev,=trace_aranges,=gdb_index]
|
4152 |
|
|
Displays the contents of the debug sections in the file, if any are
|
4153 |
|
|
present. If one of the optional letters or words follows the switch
|
4154 |
|
|
then only data found in those specific sections will be dumped.
|
4155 |
|
|
|
4156 |
|
|
Note that there is no single letter option to display the content of
|
4157 |
|
|
trace sections or .gdb_index.
|
4158 |
|
|
|
4159 |
|
|
Note: the @option{=decodedline} option will display the interpreted
|
4160 |
|
|
contents of a .debug_line section whereas the @option{=rawline} option
|
4161 |
|
|
dumps the contents in a raw format.
|
4162 |
|
|
|
4163 |
|
|
Note: the @option{=frames-interp} option will display the interpreted
|
4164 |
|
|
contents of a .debug_frame section whereas the @option{=frames} option
|
4165 |
|
|
dumps the contents in a raw format.
|
4166 |
|
|
|
4167 |
|
|
Note: the output from the @option{=info} option can also be affected
|
4168 |
|
|
by the options @option{--dwarf-depth} and @option{--dwarf-start}.
|
4169 |
|
|
|
4170 |
|
|
@item --dwarf-depth=@var{n}
|
4171 |
|
|
Limit the dump of the @code{.debug_info} section to @var{n} children.
|
4172 |
|
|
This is only useful with @option{--debug-dump=info}. The default is
|
4173 |
|
|
to print all DIEs; the special value 0 for @var{n} will also have this
|
4174 |
|
|
effect.
|
4175 |
|
|
|
4176 |
|
|
With a non-zero value for @var{n}, DIEs at or deeper than @var{n}
|
4177 |
|
|
levels will not be printed. The range for @var{n} is zero-based.
|
4178 |
|
|
|
4179 |
|
|
@item --dwarf-start=@var{n}
|
4180 |
|
|
Print only DIEs beginning with the DIE numbered @var{n}. This is only
|
4181 |
|
|
useful with @option{--debug-dump=info}.
|
4182 |
|
|
|
4183 |
|
|
If specified, this option will suppress printing of any header
|
4184 |
|
|
information and all DIEs before the DIE numbered @var{n}. Only
|
4185 |
|
|
siblings and children of the specified DIE will be printed.
|
4186 |
|
|
|
4187 |
|
|
This can be used in conjunction with @option{--dwarf-depth}.
|
4188 |
|
|
|
4189 |
|
|
@item -I
|
4190 |
|
|
@itemx --histogram
|
4191 |
|
|
Display a histogram of bucket list lengths when displaying the contents
|
4192 |
|
|
of the symbol tables.
|
4193 |
|
|
|
4194 |
|
|
@item -v
|
4195 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
4196 |
|
|
Display the version number of readelf.
|
4197 |
|
|
|
4198 |
|
|
@item -W
|
4199 |
|
|
@itemx --wide
|
4200 |
|
|
Don't break output lines to fit into 80 columns. By default
|
4201 |
|
|
@command{readelf} breaks section header and segment listing lines for
|
4202 |
|
|
64-bit ELF files, so that they fit into 80 columns. This option causes
|
4203 |
|
|
@command{readelf} to print each section header resp. each segment one a
|
4204 |
|
|
single line, which is far more readable on terminals wider than 80 columns.
|
4205 |
|
|
|
4206 |
|
|
@item -H
|
4207 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
4208 |
|
|
Display the command line options understood by @command{readelf}.
|
4209 |
|
|
|
4210 |
|
|
@end table
|
4211 |
|
|
|
4212 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4213 |
|
|
|
4214 |
|
|
@ignore
|
4215 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO readelf
|
4216 |
|
|
objdump(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
4217 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4218 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
4219 |
|
|
|
4220 |
|
|
@node elfedit
|
4221 |
|
|
@chapter elfedit
|
4222 |
|
|
|
4223 |
|
|
@cindex Update ELF header
|
4224 |
|
|
@kindex elfedit
|
4225 |
|
|
|
4226 |
|
|
@c man title elfedit Update the ELF header of ELF files.
|
4227 |
|
|
|
4228 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4229 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS elfedit
|
4230 |
|
|
elfedit [@option{--input-mach=}@var{machine}]
|
4231 |
|
|
[@option{--input-type=}@var{type}]
|
4232 |
|
|
[@option{--input-osabi=}@var{osabi}]
|
4233 |
|
|
@option{--output-mach=}@var{machine}
|
4234 |
|
|
@option{--output-type=}@var{type}
|
4235 |
|
|
@option{--output-osabi=}@var{osabi}
|
4236 |
|
|
[@option{-v}|@option{--version}]
|
4237 |
|
|
[@option{-h}|@option{--help}]
|
4238 |
|
|
@var{elffile}@dots{}
|
4239 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4240 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4241 |
|
|
|
4242 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION elfedit
|
4243 |
|
|
|
4244 |
|
|
@command{elfedit} updates the ELF header of ELF files which have
|
4245 |
|
|
the matching ELF machine and file types. The options control how and
|
4246 |
|
|
which fields in the ELF header should be updated.
|
4247 |
|
|
|
4248 |
|
|
@var{elffile}@dots{} are the ELF files to be updated. 32-bit and
|
4249 |
|
|
64-bit ELF files are supported, as are archives containing ELF files.
|
4250 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4251 |
|
|
|
4252 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS elfedit
|
4253 |
|
|
|
4254 |
|
|
The long and short forms of options, shown here as alternatives, are
|
4255 |
|
|
equivalent. At least one of the @option{--output-mach},
|
4256 |
|
|
@option{--output-type} and @option{--output-osabi} options must be given.
|
4257 |
|
|
|
4258 |
|
|
@table @env
|
4259 |
|
|
|
4260 |
|
|
@itemx --input-mach=@var{machine}
|
4261 |
|
|
Set the matching input ELF machine type to @var{machine}. If
|
4262 |
|
|
@option{--input-mach} isn't specified, it will match any ELF
|
4263 |
|
|
machine types.
|
4264 |
|
|
|
4265 |
|
|
The supported ELF machine types are, @var{L1OM} and @var{x86-64}.
|
4266 |
|
|
|
4267 |
|
|
@itemx --output-mach=@var{machine}
|
4268 |
|
|
Change the ELF machine type in the ELF header to @var{machine}. The
|
4269 |
|
|
supported ELF machine types are the same as @option{--input-mach}.
|
4270 |
|
|
|
4271 |
|
|
@itemx --input-type=@var{type}
|
4272 |
|
|
Set the matching input ELF file type to @var{type}. If
|
4273 |
|
|
@option{--input-type} isn't specified, it will match any ELF file types.
|
4274 |
|
|
|
4275 |
|
|
The supported ELF file types are, @var{rel}, @var{exec} and @var{dyn}.
|
4276 |
|
|
|
4277 |
|
|
@itemx --output-type=@var{type}
|
4278 |
|
|
Change the ELF file type in the ELF header to @var{type}. The
|
4279 |
|
|
supported ELF types are the same as @option{--input-type}.
|
4280 |
|
|
|
4281 |
|
|
@itemx --input-osabi=@var{osabi}
|
4282 |
|
|
Set the matching input ELF file OSABI to @var{osabi}. If
|
4283 |
|
|
@option{--input-osabi} isn't specified, it will match any ELF OSABIs.
|
4284 |
|
|
|
4285 |
|
|
The supported ELF OSABIs are, @var{none}, @var{HPUX}, @var{NetBSD},
|
4286 |
|
|
@var{Linux}, @var{Hurd}, @var{Solaris}, @var{AIX}, @var{Irix},
|
4287 |
|
|
@var{FreeBSD}, @var{TRU64}, @var{Modesto}, @var{OpenBSD}, @var{OpenVMS},
|
4288 |
|
|
@var{NSK}, @var{AROS} and @var{FenixOS}.
|
4289 |
|
|
|
4290 |
|
|
@itemx --output-osabi=@var{osabi}
|
4291 |
|
|
Change the ELF OSABI in the ELF header to @var{osabi}. The
|
4292 |
|
|
supported ELF OSABI are the same as @option{--input-osabi}.
|
4293 |
|
|
|
4294 |
|
|
@item -v
|
4295 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
4296 |
|
|
Display the version number of @command{elfedit}.
|
4297 |
|
|
|
4298 |
|
|
@item -h
|
4299 |
|
|
@itemx --help
|
4300 |
|
|
Display the command line options understood by @command{elfedit}.
|
4301 |
|
|
|
4302 |
|
|
@end table
|
4303 |
|
|
|
4304 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4305 |
|
|
|
4306 |
|
|
@ignore
|
4307 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO elfedit
|
4308 |
|
|
readelf(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils}.
|
4309 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4310 |
|
|
@end ignore
|
4311 |
|
|
|
4312 |
|
|
@node Common Options
|
4313 |
|
|
@chapter Common Options
|
4314 |
|
|
|
4315 |
|
|
The following command-line options are supported by all of the
|
4316 |
|
|
programs described in this manual.
|
4317 |
|
|
|
4318 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
4319 |
|
|
@table @env
|
4320 |
|
|
@include at-file.texi
|
4321 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4322 |
|
|
|
4323 |
|
|
@item --help
|
4324 |
|
|
Display the command-line options supported by the program.
|
4325 |
|
|
|
4326 |
|
|
@item --version
|
4327 |
|
|
Display the version number of the program.
|
4328 |
|
|
|
4329 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
4330 |
|
|
@end table
|
4331 |
|
|
@c man end
|
4332 |
|
|
|
4333 |
|
|
@node Selecting the Target System
|
4334 |
|
|
@chapter Selecting the Target System
|
4335 |
|
|
|
4336 |
|
|
You can specify two aspects of the target system to the @sc{gnu}
|
4337 |
|
|
binary file utilities, each in several ways:
|
4338 |
|
|
|
4339 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
4340 |
|
|
@item
|
4341 |
|
|
the target
|
4342 |
|
|
|
4343 |
|
|
@item
|
4344 |
|
|
the architecture
|
4345 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
4346 |
|
|
|
4347 |
|
|
In the following summaries, the lists of ways to specify values are in
|
4348 |
|
|
order of decreasing precedence. The ways listed first override those
|
4349 |
|
|
listed later.
|
4350 |
|
|
|
4351 |
|
|
The commands to list valid values only list the values for which the
|
4352 |
|
|
programs you are running were configured. If they were configured with
|
4353 |
|
|
@option{--enable-targets=all}, the commands list most of the available
|
4354 |
|
|
values, but a few are left out; not all targets can be configured in at
|
4355 |
|
|
once because some of them can only be configured @dfn{native} (on hosts
|
4356 |
|
|
with the same type as the target system).
|
4357 |
|
|
|
4358 |
|
|
@menu
|
4359 |
|
|
* Target Selection::
|
4360 |
|
|
* Architecture Selection::
|
4361 |
|
|
@end menu
|
4362 |
|
|
|
4363 |
|
|
@node Target Selection
|
4364 |
|
|
@section Target Selection
|
4365 |
|
|
|
4366 |
|
|
A @dfn{target} is an object file format. A given target may be
|
4367 |
|
|
supported for multiple architectures (@pxref{Architecture Selection}).
|
4368 |
|
|
A target selection may also have variations for different operating
|
4369 |
|
|
systems or architectures.
|
4370 |
|
|
|
4371 |
|
|
The command to list valid target values is @samp{objdump -i}
|
4372 |
|
|
(the first column of output contains the relevant information).
|
4373 |
|
|
|
4374 |
|
|
Some sample values are: @samp{a.out-hp300bsd}, @samp{ecoff-littlemips},
|
4375 |
|
|
@samp{a.out-sunos-big}.
|
4376 |
|
|
|
4377 |
|
|
You can also specify a target using a configuration triplet. This is
|
4378 |
|
|
the same sort of name that is passed to @file{configure} to specify a
|
4379 |
|
|
target. When you use a configuration triplet as an argument, it must be
|
4380 |
|
|
fully canonicalized. You can see the canonical version of a triplet by
|
4381 |
|
|
running the shell script @file{config.sub} which is included with the
|
4382 |
|
|
sources.
|
4383 |
|
|
|
4384 |
|
|
Some sample configuration triplets are: @samp{m68k-hp-bsd},
|
4385 |
|
|
@samp{mips-dec-ultrix}, @samp{sparc-sun-sunos}.
|
4386 |
|
|
|
4387 |
|
|
@subheading @command{objdump} Target
|
4388 |
|
|
|
4389 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4390 |
|
|
|
4391 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4392 |
|
|
@item
|
4393 |
|
|
command line option: @option{-b} or @option{--target}
|
4394 |
|
|
|
4395 |
|
|
@item
|
4396 |
|
|
environment variable @code{GNUTARGET}
|
4397 |
|
|
|
4398 |
|
|
@item
|
4399 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4400 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4401 |
|
|
|
4402 |
|
|
@subheading @command{objcopy} and @command{strip} Input Target
|
4403 |
|
|
|
4404 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4405 |
|
|
|
4406 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4407 |
|
|
@item
|
4408 |
|
|
command line options: @option{-I} or @option{--input-target}, or @option{-F} or @option{--target}
|
4409 |
|
|
|
4410 |
|
|
@item
|
4411 |
|
|
environment variable @code{GNUTARGET}
|
4412 |
|
|
|
4413 |
|
|
@item
|
4414 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4415 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4416 |
|
|
|
4417 |
|
|
@subheading @command{objcopy} and @command{strip} Output Target
|
4418 |
|
|
|
4419 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4420 |
|
|
|
4421 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4422 |
|
|
@item
|
4423 |
|
|
command line options: @option{-O} or @option{--output-target}, or @option{-F} or @option{--target}
|
4424 |
|
|
|
4425 |
|
|
@item
|
4426 |
|
|
the input target (see ``@command{objcopy} and @command{strip} Input Target'' above)
|
4427 |
|
|
|
4428 |
|
|
@item
|
4429 |
|
|
environment variable @code{GNUTARGET}
|
4430 |
|
|
|
4431 |
|
|
@item
|
4432 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4433 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4434 |
|
|
|
4435 |
|
|
@subheading @command{nm}, @command{size}, and @command{strings} Target
|
4436 |
|
|
|
4437 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4438 |
|
|
|
4439 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4440 |
|
|
@item
|
4441 |
|
|
command line option: @option{--target}
|
4442 |
|
|
|
4443 |
|
|
@item
|
4444 |
|
|
environment variable @code{GNUTARGET}
|
4445 |
|
|
|
4446 |
|
|
@item
|
4447 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4448 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4449 |
|
|
|
4450 |
|
|
@node Architecture Selection
|
4451 |
|
|
@section Architecture Selection
|
4452 |
|
|
|
4453 |
|
|
An @dfn{architecture} is a type of @sc{cpu} on which an object file is
|
4454 |
|
|
to run. Its name may contain a colon, separating the name of the
|
4455 |
|
|
processor family from the name of the particular @sc{cpu}.
|
4456 |
|
|
|
4457 |
|
|
The command to list valid architecture values is @samp{objdump -i} (the
|
4458 |
|
|
second column contains the relevant information).
|
4459 |
|
|
|
4460 |
|
|
Sample values: @samp{m68k:68020}, @samp{mips:3000}, @samp{sparc}.
|
4461 |
|
|
|
4462 |
|
|
@subheading @command{objdump} Architecture
|
4463 |
|
|
|
4464 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4465 |
|
|
|
4466 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4467 |
|
|
@item
|
4468 |
|
|
command line option: @option{-m} or @option{--architecture}
|
4469 |
|
|
|
4470 |
|
|
@item
|
4471 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4472 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4473 |
|
|
|
4474 |
|
|
@subheading @command{objcopy}, @command{nm}, @command{size}, @command{strings} Architecture
|
4475 |
|
|
|
4476 |
|
|
Ways to specify:
|
4477 |
|
|
|
4478 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
4479 |
|
|
@item
|
4480 |
|
|
deduced from the input file
|
4481 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
4482 |
|
|
|
4483 |
|
|
@node Reporting Bugs
|
4484 |
|
|
@chapter Reporting Bugs
|
4485 |
|
|
@cindex bugs
|
4486 |
|
|
@cindex reporting bugs
|
4487 |
|
|
|
4488 |
|
|
Your bug reports play an essential role in making the binary utilities
|
4489 |
|
|
reliable.
|
4490 |
|
|
|
4491 |
|
|
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
|
4492 |
|
|
it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
|
4493 |
|
|
to help the entire community by making the next version of the binary
|
4494 |
|
|
utilities work better. Bug reports are your contribution to their
|
4495 |
|
|
maintenance.
|
4496 |
|
|
|
4497 |
|
|
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
4498 |
|
|
information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
4499 |
|
|
|
4500 |
|
|
@menu
|
4501 |
|
|
* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
4502 |
|
|
* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
4503 |
|
|
@end menu
|
4504 |
|
|
|
4505 |
|
|
@node Bug Criteria
|
4506 |
|
|
@section Have You Found a Bug?
|
4507 |
|
|
@cindex bug criteria
|
4508 |
|
|
|
4509 |
|
|
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
|
4510 |
|
|
|
4511 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
4512 |
|
|
@cindex fatal signal
|
4513 |
|
|
@cindex crash
|
4514 |
|
|
@item
|
4515 |
|
|
If a binary utility gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
|
4516 |
|
|
a bug. Reliable utilities never crash.
|
4517 |
|
|
|
4518 |
|
|
@cindex error on valid input
|
4519 |
|
|
@item
|
4520 |
|
|
If a binary utility produces an error message for valid input, that is a
|
4521 |
|
|
bug.
|
4522 |
|
|
|
4523 |
|
|
@item
|
4524 |
|
|
If you are an experienced user of binary utilities, your suggestions for
|
4525 |
|
|
improvement are welcome in any case.
|
4526 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
4527 |
|
|
|
4528 |
|
|
@node Bug Reporting
|
4529 |
|
|
@section How to Report Bugs
|
4530 |
|
|
@cindex bug reports
|
4531 |
|
|
@cindex bugs, reporting
|
4532 |
|
|
|
4533 |
|
|
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
|
4534 |
|
|
products. If you obtained the binary utilities from a support
|
4535 |
|
|
organization, we recommend you contact that organization first.
|
4536 |
|
|
|
4537 |
|
|
You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
4538 |
|
|
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
|
4539 |
|
|
distribution.
|
4540 |
|
|
|
4541 |
|
|
@ifset BUGURL
|
4542 |
|
|
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for the binary
|
4543 |
|
|
utilities to @value{BUGURL}.
|
4544 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
4545 |
|
|
|
4546 |
|
|
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
|
4547 |
|
|
@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
|
4548 |
|
|
fact or leave it out, state it!
|
4549 |
|
|
|
4550 |
|
|
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
4551 |
|
|
problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
4552 |
|
|
assume that the name of a file you use in an example does not matter.
|
4553 |
|
|
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is
|
4554 |
|
|
a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
|
4555 |
|
|
that pathname is stored in memory; perhaps, if the pathname were
|
4556 |
|
|
different, the contents of that location would fool the utility into
|
4557 |
|
|
doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
|
4558 |
|
|
specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
|
4559 |
|
|
and the most helpful.
|
4560 |
|
|
|
4561 |
|
|
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
|
4562 |
|
|
it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
|
4563 |
|
|
that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
4564 |
|
|
|
4565 |
|
|
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
|
4566 |
|
|
bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
4567 |
|
|
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
|
4568 |
|
|
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
4569 |
|
|
|
4570 |
|
|
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
4571 |
|
|
|
4572 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
4573 |
|
|
@item
|
4574 |
|
|
The version of the utility. Each utility announces it if you start it
|
4575 |
|
|
with the @option{--version} argument.
|
4576 |
|
|
|
4577 |
|
|
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
|
4578 |
|
|
the bug in the current version of the binary utilities.
|
4579 |
|
|
|
4580 |
|
|
@item
|
4581 |
|
|
Any patches you may have applied to the source, including any patches
|
4582 |
|
|
made to the @code{BFD} library.
|
4583 |
|
|
|
4584 |
|
|
@item
|
4585 |
|
|
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
|
4586 |
|
|
version number.
|
4587 |
|
|
|
4588 |
|
|
@item
|
4589 |
|
|
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the utilities---e.g.
|
4590 |
|
|
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
|
4591 |
|
|
|
4592 |
|
|
@item
|
4593 |
|
|
The command arguments you gave the utility to observe the bug. To
|
4594 |
|
|
guarantee you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy
|
4595 |
|
|
of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
|
4596 |
|
|
|
4597 |
|
|
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
|
4598 |
|
|
and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
4599 |
|
|
|
4600 |
|
|
@item
|
4601 |
|
|
A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
|
4602 |
|
|
bug. If the utility is reading an object file or files, then it is
|
4603 |
|
|
generally most helpful to send the actual object files.
|
4604 |
|
|
|
4605 |
|
|
If the source files were produced exclusively using @sc{gnu} programs
|
4606 |
|
|
(e.g., @command{gcc}, @command{gas}, and/or the @sc{gnu} @command{ld}), then it
|
4607 |
|
|
may be OK to send the source files rather than the object files. In
|
4608 |
|
|
this case, be sure to say exactly what version of @command{gcc}, or
|
4609 |
|
|
whatever, was used to produce the object files. Also say how
|
4610 |
|
|
@command{gcc}, or whatever, was configured.
|
4611 |
|
|
|
4612 |
|
|
@item
|
4613 |
|
|
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
4614 |
|
|
incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
|
4615 |
|
|
|
4616 |
|
|
Of course, if the bug is that the utility gets a fatal signal, then we
|
4617 |
|
|
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
|
4618 |
|
|
not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
|
4619 |
|
|
a chance to make a mistake.
|
4620 |
|
|
|
4621 |
|
|
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
|
4622 |
|
|
say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as your
|
4623 |
|
|
copy of the utility is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in
|
4624 |
|
|
the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might
|
4625 |
|
|
crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when
|
4626 |
|
|
ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for
|
4627 |
|
|
us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able
|
4628 |
|
|
to draw any conclusion from our observations.
|
4629 |
|
|
|
4630 |
|
|
@item
|
4631 |
|
|
If you wish to suggest changes to the source, send us context diffs, as
|
4632 |
|
|
generated by @command{diff} with the @option{-u}, @option{-c}, or @option{-p}
|
4633 |
|
|
option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you
|
4634 |
|
|
wish to discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
|
4635 |
|
|
context, not by line number.
|
4636 |
|
|
|
4637 |
|
|
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
|
4638 |
|
|
sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
|
4639 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
4640 |
|
|
|
4641 |
|
|
Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
4642 |
|
|
|
4643 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
4644 |
|
|
@item
|
4645 |
|
|
A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
4646 |
|
|
|
4647 |
|
|
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
4648 |
|
|
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
4649 |
|
|
changes will not affect it.
|
4650 |
|
|
|
4651 |
|
|
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
|
4652 |
|
|
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
|
4653 |
|
|
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
|
4654 |
|
|
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
4655 |
|
|
|
4656 |
|
|
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
|
4657 |
|
|
of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
4658 |
|
|
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
4659 |
|
|
less time, and so on.
|
4660 |
|
|
|
4661 |
|
|
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
|
4662 |
|
|
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
|
4663 |
|
|
|
4664 |
|
|
@item
|
4665 |
|
|
A patch for the bug.
|
4666 |
|
|
|
4667 |
|
|
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
|
4668 |
|
|
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
|
4669 |
|
|
a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
|
4670 |
|
|
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
|
4671 |
|
|
|
4672 |
|
|
Sometimes with programs as complicated as the binary utilities it is
|
4673 |
|
|
very hard to construct an example that will make the program follow a
|
4674 |
|
|
certain path through the code. If you do not send us the example, we
|
4675 |
|
|
will not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
|
4676 |
|
|
the bug is fixed.
|
4677 |
|
|
|
4678 |
|
|
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
|
4679 |
|
|
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
|
4680 |
|
|
help us to understand.
|
4681 |
|
|
|
4682 |
|
|
@item
|
4683 |
|
|
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
4684 |
|
|
|
4685 |
|
|
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
|
4686 |
|
|
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
4687 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
4688 |
|
|
|
4689 |
|
|
@node GNU Free Documentation License
|
4690 |
|
|
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
|
4691 |
|
|
|
4692 |
|
|
@include fdl.texi
|
4693 |
|
|
|
4694 |
|
|
@node Binutils Index
|
4695 |
|
|
@unnumbered Binutils Index
|
4696 |
|
|
|
4697 |
|
|
@printindex cp
|
4698 |
|
|
|
4699 |
|
|
@bye
|